Cisco IOS Commands for Access Points
and Bridges

This chapter lists and describes Cisco IOS commands in Cisco IOS Releases 15.2(2)JB that you use to configure and manage your access point, bridge, and wireless LAN. The commands are listed alphabetically. Refer to Appendix A, “List of Supported Cisco IOS Commands,” for a complete list of Cisco IOS commands supported by access points and bridges.

11w client | association-comeback | saquery-retry (SSID configuration mode)

To enable 802.11w data transfer, use the 11w client | association-comeback | saquery-retry command in SSID configuration mode command.

11w client | association-comeback | saquery-retry

 
Syntax Description

client

Specifies the 11w client

optional

Specifies that the 11w is optional.

required

Specifies that 11w is required

association-comeback

Specifies the association comeback time. Valid range is from 1000ms to 20000ms.

saquery-retry

Specifies the saquery retry time. Valid range is from 100ms to 500ms.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

aaa authentication login default local cache

To set a local login cache for authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) authentication, use the aaa authentication login default local cache command in global configuration mode. To disable the local login cache, use the no form of this command:

[no] aaa authentication login default local cache [word | radius | tacacs+]

 
Syntax Description

word

Character string used to name the local login cache used for AAA authentication login.

radius

(Optional) Specifies the RADIUS host used for the AAA authentication login.

tacacs+

(Optional) Specifies the TACACS+ host used for the AAA authentication login.

 
Command Default

There is no default for this command.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

The following example creates a local cache for an AAA authentication list called tac_admin set as the default list used for all login authentications. This authentication checks the local cache first, and if the information is not available, the authentication server (group tac_admin) is contacted and the information is also stored in the local cache.

AP(config)# aaa authentication login default cache tac_admin group tac_admin
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

aaa authorization exec default local cache

Sets the local cache for AAA exec authorization

aaa cache profile

Sets the AAA cache profile name

aaa group server

Sets the AAA group server name

cache authorization profile

Sets the cache authorization profile name

cache expiry

Sets the expiration time for the local cache

server

Sets the IP address for the server

aaa authorization exec default local cache

To set a local cache for AAA exec authorization, use the aaa authorization exec default local cache command in global configuration mode. To disable the local cache, use the no form of this command:

[no] aaa authorization exec default local cache [word| radius | tacacs+]

 
Syntax Description

word

Character string used to name the local cache for exec AAA authorization.

radius

(Optional) Specifies the RADIUS server used for the exec AAA authorization.

tacacs+

(Optional) Specifies the TACACS+ server used for the exec AAA authorization.

 
Command Default

There is no default for this command.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

The following example creates a local exec mode cache for an AAA authorization list called tac_admin set as the default list used for all login authorizations. This authorization checks the local cache first, and if the information is not available, the authorization server (group tac_admin) is contacted and the information is also stored in the local cache.

AP(config)# aaa authorization exec default cache tac_admin group tac_admin
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

aaa authentication login default local cache

Sets local cache for AAA authentication login

aaa cache profile

Sets the AAA cache profile name

aaa group server

Sets the AAA group server name

cache authentication profile

Sets the cache authentication profile name

cache expiry

Sets the expiration time for the local cache

server

Sets the IP address for the server

aaa cache profile

To set storage rules for the AAA cache, use the aaa cache profile command in global configuration mode. To disable the AAA cache profile, use the no form of this command:

[no] aaa cache profile name
[no] profile exact match [no-auth]
[no] regexp match expression [any | only] [no-auth]
[no] all [no-auth]

 
Syntax Description

name

Character string used to name the AAA cache profile.

profile exact match

Specifies a username that must exactly match the AAA server response before the information is saved in the cache.

no-auth

Specifies that password authentication is not performed.

regexp match expression

Specifies a regular expression that must match the AAA server response before the information is included in the cache.

Note This option is not recommended because it can require extensive processing time.

any

Specifies that any AAA server response that matches
regexp match expression is saved in the cache.

only

Specifies that only 1 AAA server response that matches
regexp match expression is saved in the cache.

all

Specifies that all AAA server responses are saved in the cache.

 
Command Default

There is no default for this command.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

The following example sets a name of admin_cache for the AAA cache profile and only stores AAA server responses with the username administrator in the cache.

AP(config)# aaa cache admin_cache
AP(config-profile-map)# profile administrator

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

aaa authentication login default local cache

Sets local cache for AAA authentication login

aaa authentication login default local cache

Sets local cache for AAA authentication login

aaa group server

Sets the AAA group server name

cache authentication profile

Sets the cache authentication profile name

cache authorization profile

Sets the cache authorization profile name

cache expiry

Sets the expiration time for the local cache

server

Sets the IP address for the server

aaa new-model

To enable new commands on the access point, use the aaa new-model command in the global configuration mode. This command disables all old commands.

aaa new-model

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Command Default

None

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable new commands on an access point:

ap(config)# aaa new-model

aaa pod server

To enable inbound user sessions to be disconnected when specific session attributes are presented, use the aaa pod server command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.

Packet of Disconnect (POD) consists of a method of terminating a session that is already connected. The POD is a RADIUS disconnect_request packet and is intended to be used in situations where the authenticating agent server wants to disconnect the user after the session has been accepted by the RADIUS access_accept packet.

aaa pod server {
auth-type [all | any | session-key] |
clients IP-address |
ignore [server-key | session-key] |
port number |
server-key string}

no aaa pod server

 
Syntax Description

auth-type

(Optional) Specifies the type of authorization required for disconnecting
sessions. For 802.11 sessions, the Calling-Station-ID [31] RADIUS attribute must be supplied in the POD request. This is the MAC address of the client. No other attributes are used; therefore all and any have the same effect.

Note session-key is not supported for 802.11 sessions.

any

(Optional) Specifies that the session that matches all attributes sent in the POD
packets are disconnected. The POD packet can contain one or more of four key attributes (user-name, framed-IP-address, session-ID, and session-key).

all

(Optional) Only a session that matches all four key attributes is disconnected. All is the default.

clients address

(Optional) Specifies the IP addresses for up to four RADIUS servers that may be nominated as clients. If this configuration is present and a POD request originates from a device that is not on the list, it is rejected.

ignore

(Optional) When set to server-key, the shared secret is not validated when a POD request is received.

port number

(Optional) Specifies the unsolicited data packet (UDP) port on which the access point listens for packet of disconnect (POD) requests. If no port is specified, the default 1700 port is used.

session-key

(Optional) Specifies that the session that has a matching session-key attribute is
disconnected. All other attributes are ignored.

Note This option is not supported for 802.11 sessions.

server-key string

Configures the secret text string that is shared between the network access server and the client workstation. This secret string must be the same on both systems.

The POD server function is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.1(3)T

This command was introduced.

12.3(8)JA

The clients and ignore keywords were added.

 
Usage Guidelines

For a session to be disconnected, the values in one or more of the key fields in the POD request must match the values for a session on one of the network access server ports. Which values must match depends on the auth-type attribute defined in the command. If no auth-type is specified, all four values must match. If no match is found, all connections remain intact and an error response is returned. The key fields are:

  • User-Name
  • Framed-IP-Address
  • Session-ID
  • Server-Key

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

aaa authentication

Enables authentication.

aaa accounting

Enables accounting records.

aaa accounting delay-start

Delays generation of the start accounting record until the user IP address is established.

debug aaa pod

Displays debug messages related to POD packets.

radius-server host

Identifies a RADIUS host.

accounting (SSID configuration mode)

Use the accounting SSID configuration mode command to enable RADIUS accounting for the radio interface (for the specified SSID). Use the no form of the command to disable accounting.

[no] accounting list-name

 
Syntax Description

list-name

Specifies the name of an accounting list.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You create accounting lists using the aaa accounting command. These lists indirectly reference the server where the accounting information is stored.

Examples

This example shows how to enable RADIUS accounting and set the RADIUS server name:

AP(config-if-ssid)# accounting radius1
 

This example shows how to disable RADIUS accounting:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no accounting

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

address

To specify the IP address, authentication port and accounting port while configuring the RADIUS server on the access point, use the address command in the radius server configuration submode.

address [IP address ip-address ] [auth-port port-number ] [acct-port port-number ]

 
Syntax Description

IP address

Specifies the IP address. It can be an IPv4 or IPv6 address.

auth-port

Specifies the UDP destination port for authentication requests

acct-port

Specifies the UDP destination port for accounting requests

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

RADIUS server configuration submode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the IP address, authentication port and accounting port while configuring the RADIUS server on the access point:

ap(config)# radius server abcd
ap(config-radius-server)# address ipv4 1.1.1.1 auth-port 1812 acct-port 1813 key
ap(config-radius-server)# key cisco
ap(config-radius-server)# end

address

To specify the IP address, while configuring the TACACs server on the access point, use the address command in the tacacs server configuration submode.

address IP address ip-address

 
Syntax Description

IP address

Specifies the IP address. It can be an IPv4 or IPv6 address.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

TACACS server configuration submode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the IP address, while configuring the TACACS server on the access point:

ap(config)# tacacs server somename
ap(config-server-tacacs)# address ipv4 1.1.1.1
ap(config-server-tacacs)# exit

admission-control (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Use the admission-control QOS Class interface configuration mode command to require call admission control (CAC) traffic for a radio interface. Use the no form of the command to remove the setting.

[no] admission-control


Note This command is not supported on c1200 and c1100 platforms.



Note This command is not supported when operating in repeater mode.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

QOS Class interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure CAC admission control as a requirement for the radio interface:

AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# dot11 qos class voice
AP(config-if-qosclass)# admission-control
 

This example shows how to remove the CAC admission control requirement on the radio interface:

AP(config-if-qosclass)# no admission-control

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC traffic is enabled for the radio interface.

cw-max (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC maximum contention window size for the radio interface.

cw-min (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC minimum contention window size for the radio interface.

fixed-slot (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC fixed fallback slot time for the radio interface.

transmit-op (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC transmit opportunity time for the radio interface.

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Use the admit-traffic QOS Class interface configuration mode command to enable CAC traffic for a radio interface. Use the no form of the command to disable all CAC traffic for the access point.

admit-traffic {narrowband | signaling} {infinite | max-channel percent}
[roam-channel roam]

no admit-traffic


Note This command is not supported when operating in repeater mode.


 
Syntax Description

narrowband

Specifies that narrowband codecs are allowed on the radio interface.

signaling

Specifies that signaling only is allowed on the radio interface.

infinite

Specifies unlimited channel utilization is allowed for the CAC traffic on the radio interface.

max-channel percent

Specifies the maximum percentage (1 to 100) of channel utilization allowed for CAC traffic on the radio interface.

roam-channel roam

Specifies the maximum percentage (1 to 100) of channel utilization that is reserved for roaming CAC traffic on the radio interface.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

QOS Class interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure CAC voice traffic parameters for the radio interface:

AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# dot11 qos class voice
AP(config-if-qosclass)# narrowband max-channel 30 roam-channel 10 channel-min 10
 

This example shows how to disable CAC traffic on the radio interface:

AP(config-if-qosclass)# no admin-traffic

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admit-traffic (SSID interface configuration mode)

Enables CAC admission control for an SSID on the access point.

show dot11 cac

Displays admission control information for the access point.

traffic-stream

Configures CAC traffic data rates and priorities for a radio interface on the access point.

debug cac

Provides CAC admission control debugging information for on the access point.

anonymous-id (dot1x credentials configuration mode)

Use the anonymous-id dot1x credentials configuration mode command to configure an anonymous username for the dot1x credentials. Use the no form of the command to disable anonymous-id.

[no] anonymous-id name

 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies the anonymous username for the dot1x credentials.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a dot1x certificate anonymous username:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# anonymous-id user1
 

This example shows how to disable the anonymous username:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# no anonymous-id

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x credentials

Configures the dot1x credentials on the access point.

show dot1x credentials

Displays the configured dot1x credentials on the access point.

antenna

Use the antenna configuration interface command to configure the radio receive or transmit antenna settings. Use the no form of this command to reset the receive antenna to defaults.

[no] antenna
{gain gain |
{receive | transmit {diversity | left | middle | right}}}

 
Syntax Description

gain gain

Specifies the resultant gain of the antenna attached to the device. Enter a value from –128 to 128 dB. If necessary, you can use a decimal in the value, such as 1.5.

Note This setting does not affect the behavior of the wireless device; it only informs the WLSE on your network of the device’s antenna gain.

receive

Specifies the antenna that the access uses to receive radio signals

transmit

Specifies the antenna that the access uses to transmit radio signals

diversity

Specifies the antenna with the best signal

left

Specifies the left antenna

middle

Specifies the middle antenna for devices so equipped

right

Specifies the right antenna

 
Defaults

The default antenna configuration is diversity.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the right receive antenna option:

AP(config-if)# antenna receive right
 

This example shows how to set the receive antenna option to defaults:

AP(config-if)# no antenna receive
 

This example shows how to enter an antenna gain setting:

AP(config-if)# antenna gain 1.5
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

power local

Configures the radio power level

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

ampdu

Use the ampdu command to allow or disallow the use of 802.11n AMPDU aggregation for a particular class of service. The command should be used on classes of service that have considerable traffic (such as best effort or video) where the packets are transmitted close together in time so that they can be aggregated. The command applies only to the 802.11n radio interfaces.

Use the no form of this command to reset the receive antenna to defaults.

[no] ampdu
{transmit |
{priority |0-7|}

 
Syntax Description

ampdu transmit priority [0-7]

Assigns a class of service transmit priority to the selected 802.11n radio interface as follows:

  • Best Effort (0)
  • Background (1)
  • Spare (2)
  • Excellent (3)
  • Control Lead (4)
  • Video <100ms Latency (5)
  • Voice <100ms Latency (6)
  • Network Control (7)

 
Defaults

AMPDU priority 0 is enabled default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(10b)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify AMPDU transmit priority 7 to an 802.11n radio interface

AP(config-if)# ampdu transmit priority 7
 

This example shows how to disable AMPDU transmit priority to the 802.11 radio interface:

AP(config-if)# no ampdu
 

 

authentication (local server configuration mode)

Use the authentication local server configuration command to specify the authentication types that are allowed on the local authenticator. By default, a local authenticator access point performs LEAP, EAP-FAST, and MAC-based authentication for up to 50 client devices. You use the no form of the authentication command to limit the local authenticator to one or more authentication types.

[no] authentication [eapfast] [leap] [ mac ]


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

eapfast

Specifies that the local authenticator performs EAP-FAST authentication for client devices.

leap

Specifies that the local authenticator performs LEAP authentication for client devices.

mac

Specifies that the local authenticator performs MAC-address authentication for client devices.

 
Defaults

By default, a local authenticator access point performs LEAP, EAP-FAST, and MAC-based authentication. To limit the local authenticator to one or two authentication types, use the no form of the command to disable unwanted authentication types.

 
Command Modes

Local server configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to limit the local authenticator to perform only LEAP authentications for client devices:

AP(config-radsrv)# no authentication eapfast
AP(config-radsrv)# no authentication mac
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

group (local server configuration mode)

Creates a user group on the local authenticator and enters user group configuration mode

nas (local server configuration mode)

Adds an access point to the list of NAS access points on the local authenticator

radius-server local

Enables the access point as a local authenticator and enters local server configuration mode

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

authentication client

Use the authentication client configuration interface command to configure a LEAP username and password that the access point uses when authenticating to the network as a repeater.

authentication client username username password password

 
Syntax Description

username

Specifies the repeater’s LEAP username

password

Specifies the repeater’s LEAP password

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the LEAP username and password that the repeater uses to authenticate to the network:

AP(config-if-ssid)# authentication client username ap-north password buckeye
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

authentication key-management

Use the authentication key-management SSID configuration mode command to configure the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support authenticated key management. Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM) and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) are the key management types supported on the access point.

authentication key-management {[wpa version] [cckm]} [optional]


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

wpa version {1 | 2}

Specifies WPA MFP version authenticated key management for the SSID

  • Version 1—WPAv1handshake for TKIP encryption
  • Version 2—WPAv2 handshake for AES-CCMP encryption

cckm

Specifies CCKM authenticated key management for the SSID

optional

Specifies that client devices that do not support authenticated key management can use the SSID

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(13)JA

This command was modified to allow you to enable both WPA and CCKM for an SSID.

12.4(3g)JA & 12.3(8)JEB

This command was modified to allow you to specify MFP versions 1 or 2 usage.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to enable authenticated key management for client devices.

  • To enable authenticated key management, you must enable a cipher suite using the encryption mode ciphers command.
  • To support WPA on a wireless LAN where 802.1x-based authentication is not available, you must use the wpa-psk command to configure a pre-shared key for the SSID.
  • When you enable both WPA and CCKM for an SSID, you must enter wpa first and cckm second in the command. Any WPA client can attempt to authenticate, but only CCKM voice clients can attempt to authenticate. Only 802.11b and 802.11g radios support WPA and CCKM simultaneously.
  • To enable both WPA and CCKM, you must set the encryption mode to a cipher suite that includes TKIP.

Examples

This example shows how to enable both WPA and CCKM for an SSID:

AP(config-if-ssid)# authentication key-management wpa cckm
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

encryption mode ciphers

Specifies a cipher suite

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters SSID configuration mode

wpa-psk

Specifies a pre-shared key for an SSID

authentication key-management wpa version 2 dot11r

To configure the 802.11 r radio interface (for the specified SSID), use the authentication key-management wpa version 2 dot11r command in SSID configuration mode.

authentication key-management wpa version 2 dot11r

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure 802.11r radio interface for a specified interface:

ap(config-ssid)# authentication key-management wpa version 2 dot11r

authentication network-eap (SSID configuration mode)

Use the authentication network-eap SSID configuration mode command to configure the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support network-EAP authentication with optional MAC address authentication. Use the no form of the command to disable network-eap authentication for the SSID.

[no] authentication
network-eap list-name
[mac-address list-name]


Note The mac-address option is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

list-name

Specifies the list name for EAP authentication

mac-address list-name

Specifies the list name for MAC authentication

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to authenticate clients using the network EAP method, with optional MAC address screening. You define list names for MAC addresses and EAP using the aaa authentication login command. These lists define the authentication methods activated when a user logs in and indirectly identify the location where the authentication information is stored.


Note Using the CLI, you can configure up to 2,048 MAC addresses for filtering. Using the web-browser interface, however, you can configure only up to 43 MAC addresses for filtering.


Examples

This example shows how to set the authentication to open for devices on a specified address list:

AP(config-if-ssid)# authentication network-eap list1
 

This example shows how to reset the authentication to default values:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no authentication network-eap

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

authentication open (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies open authentication

authentication shared (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies shared-key authentication

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

authentication open (SSID configuration mode)

Use the authentication open SSID configuration mode command to configure the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support open authentication and optionally EAP authentication or MAC address authentication. Use the no form of the command to disable open authentication for the SSID.

[no] authentication open
[[optional] eap list-name]
[mac-address list-name [alternate] ]


Note The mac-address and alternate options are not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

eap list-name

Specifies the list name for EAP authentication

optional

Specifies that client devices using either open or EAP authentication can associate and become authenticated. This setting is used mainly by service providers that require special client accessibility.

mac-address list-name

Specifies the list name for MAC authentication

alternate

Specifies the use of either EAP authentication or MAC address authentication

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to authenticate clients using the open method, with optional MAC address or EAP screenings. If you use the alternate keyword, the client must pass either MAC address or EAP authentication. Otherwise, the client must pass both authentications. Use the optional keyword to allow client devices using either open or EAP authentication to associate and become authenticated. You define list names for MAC addresses and EAP using the aaa authentication login command. These lists define the authentication methods activated when a user logs in and indirectly identify the location where the authentication information is stored.

Examples

This example shows how to enable open authentication with MAC address restrictions:

AP(config-if-ssid)# authentication open mac-address mac-list1
 

This example shows how to disable open authentication for the SSID:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no authentication open

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

authentication shared (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies shared key authentication

authentication network-eap (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies network EAP authentication

dot11 ssid

Creates an SSID and enters SSID configuration mode

authentication shared (SSID configuration mode)

Use the authentication shared SSID configuration mode command to configure the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support shared authentication with optional MAC address authentication and EAP authentication. Use the no form of the command to disable shared authentication for the SSID.

[no] authentication shared
[mac-address
list-name]
[eap list-name]


Note The mac-address option is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

mac-address list-name

Specifies the list name for MAC authentication

eap list-name

Specifies the list name for EAP authentication

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to authenticate clients using the shared method, with optional MAC address or EAP screenings. You define list names for MAC addresses and EAP using the aaa authentication login command. These lists define the authentication methods activated when a user logs in and indirectly identify the location where the authentication information is stored.

Examples

This example shows how to set the authentication to shared for devices on a MAC address list:

AP(config-if-ssid)# authentication shared mac-address mac-list1
 

This example shows how to reset the authentication to default values:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no authentication shared

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

authentication open (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies open authentication

authentication network-eap (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies network EAP authentication

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

beacon

Use the beacon configuration interface command to specify how often the beacon contains a Delivery Traffic Indicator Message (DTIM). Use the no form of this command to reset the beacon interval to defaults.

[no] beacon {period Kms | dtim-period count }

 
Syntax Description

period Kms

Specifies the beacon time in Kilomicroseconds (Kms). Kms is a unit of measurement in software terms. K = 1024, m = 10-6, and s = seconds,
so Kms = 0.001024 seconds, 1.024 milliseconds, or 1024 microseconds.

dtim-period count

Specifies the number of DTIM beacon periods to wait before delivering multicast packets.

Note The dtim-period option is not supported on bridges.

 
Defaults

The default period is 100.

The default dtim-period is 2.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Clients normally wake up each time a beacon is sent to check for pending packets. Longer beacon periods let the client sleep longer and preserve power. Shorter beacon periods reduce the delay in receiving packets.

Controlling the DTIM period has a similar power-saving result. Increasing the DTIM period count lets clients sleep longer, but delays the delivery of multicast packets. Because multicast packets are buffered, large DTIM period counts can cause a buffer overflow.

Examples

This example shows how to specify a beacon period of 15 Kms (15.36 milliseconds):

AP(config-if)# beacon period 15
 

This example shows how to set the beacon parameter to defaults:

AP(config-if)# no beacon

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

beacon privacy guest-mode

This command must be configured if you wish the beacon frames to use the privacy settings of the guest-mode SSID. If there is no guest-mode SSID configured, the command has no effect. If there is a guest-mode SSID and the command is configured, the privacy bit present in the beacon frames are set to ON/OFF according to how the security (encryption) settings of the guest-mode SSID are configured.

The command has no effect in MBSSID mode.

 
Syntax Description

The complete syntax is [no] beacon privacy guest-mode.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

The following is a sample showing how the command is used.

ap#conf terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
ap(config)#int d0
ap(config-if)#bea
ap(config-if)#beacon ?
dtim-period dtim period
period beacon period
privacy Privacy bit
 
ap(config-if)#beacon pr
ap(config-if)#beacon privacy ?
guest-mode Use privacy bit setting of Guest ssid
 
ap(config-if)#beacon privacy g
ap(config-if)#beacon privacy guest-mode ?
 
ap(config-if)#beacon privacy guest-mode
ap(config-if)#end
ap#
*Mar 1 23:34:45.583: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
ap#sh run in d0
Building configuration...
 
Current configuration : 365 bytes
!
interface Dot11Radio0
no ip address
no ip route-cache
shutdown
speed basic-1.0 basic-2.0 basic-5.5 basic-11.0
station-role root
beacon privacy guest-mode
bridge-group 1
bridge-group 1 subscriber-loop-control
bridge-group 1 block-unknown-source
no bridge-group 1 source-learning
no bridge-group 1 unicast-flooding
bridge-group 1 spanning-disabled
end

bgp-policy

To configure the bgp-policy, use the bgp-policy command in BVI interface mode.

bgp-policy accounting {input | output} | destination {ip-prec-map | ip-qos-map} | source {ip-prec-map | ip-qos-map}

 
Syntax Description

accounting

Configures bgp based policy accounting of traffic (input on default).

destination

Uses the destination IP address for route lookup.

source

Uses the source IP address for route lookup.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

boot buffersize

To modify the buffer size used to load configuration files, use the boot buffersize global configuration command. Use the no form of the command to return to the default setting.

[ no ] boot buffersize bytes

 
Syntax Description

bytes

Specifies the size of the buffer to be used. Enter a value from 4 KB to 512 KB.

 
Defaults

The default buffer size for loading configuration files is 32 KB.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Increase the boot buffer size if your configuration file size exceeds 512 KB.

Examples

This example shows how to set the buffer size to 512 KB:

AP(config)# boot buffersize 524288
 

boot ios-break

Use the boot ios-break global configuration command to enable an access point or bridge to be reset using a send break Telnet command.

After you enter the boot ios-break command, you can connect to the access point console port and press Ctrl-] to bring up the Telnet prompt. At the Telnet prompt, enter send break. The access point reboots and reloads the image.

[ no ] boot ios-break

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable an access point or bridge to be reset using a send break Telnet command:

AP(config)# boot ios-break
 

boot mode-button

Use the boot mode-button global configuration command to enable or disable the operation of the mode button on access points with a console port. This command can be used to prevent password recovery and to prevent unauthorized users from gaining access to the access point CLI.

Use the no form of the command to disable the access point mode button.

[ no ] boot mode-button


Caution This command can be used to disable password recovery. If you lose the privileged EXEC password for the access point after entering this command, you need to contact Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to regain access to the access point CLI.

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command is enabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Note This command requires the 12.3(2)JA or later access point boot loader.

Examples

This example shows how to disable the Mode button on an access point with a console port:

AP(config)# no boot mode-button
 

This example shows how to reenable the Mode button on an access point with a console port:

AP(config)# boot mode-button
 

Note You must know the privileged EXEC password for your access point to access the CLI.


 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show boot

Displays the current boot configuration.

show boot mode-button

Displays the current status of the mode-button.

boot upgrade

Use the boot upgrade global interface command to configure access points and bridges to automatically load a configuration and use DHCP options to upgrade system software.

When your access point renews its IP address with a DHCP request, it uses the details configured on the DHCP server to download a specified configuration file from a TFTP server. If a boot system command is part of the configuration file and the unit’s current software version is different, the access point or bridge image is automatically upgraded to the version in the configuration. The access point or bridge reloads and executes the new image.

[ no ] boot upgrade

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command is enabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to prevent an access point or bridge from automatically loading a configuration and upgrading system software:

AP(config)# no boot upgrade
 

bridge aging-time

Use the bridge aging-time global configuration command to configure the length of time that a dynamic entry can remain in the bridge table from the time the entry is created or last updated.

bridge group aging-time seconds


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group

seconds

Specifies the aging time in seconds

 
Defaults

The default aging time is 300 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the aging time for bridge group 1:

bridge(config)# bridge 1 aging-time 500

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge forward-time

Specifies a forward delay interval on the bridge

bridge hello-time

Specifies the interval between the hello BPDUs

bridge max-age

Specifies the interval that the bridge waits to hear BPDUs from the spanning tree root

bridge priority

Specifies the bridge STP priority

bridge forward-time

Use the bridge forward-time global configuration command to configure the forward delay interval on the bridge.

bridge group aging-time seconds


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group

seconds

Specifies the forward time in seconds

 
Defaults

The default forward time is 30 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the forward time for bridge group 2:

bridge(config)# bridge 2 forward-time 60

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge aging-time

Specifies the length of time that a dynamic entry can remain in the bridge table from the time the entry is created or last updated

bridge hello-time

Specifies the interval between the hello BPDUs

bridge max-age

Specifies the interval that the bridge waits to hear BPDUs from the spanning tree root

bridge priority

Specifies the bridge STP priority

bridge hello-time

Use the bridge hello-time global configuration command to configure the interval between hello bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).

bridge group hello-time seconds


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group

seconds

Specifies the hello interval in seconds

 
Defaults

The default hello time is 2 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the hello time for bridge group 1:

bridge(config)# bridge 1 hello-time 15

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge aging-time

Specifies the length of time that a dynamic entry can remain in the bridge table from the time the entry is created or last updated

bridge forward-time

Specifies a forward delay interval on the bridge

bridge max-age

Specifies the interval that the bridge waits to hear BPDUs from the spanning tree root

bridge priority

Specifies the bridge STP priority

bridge max-age

Use the bridge max-age global configuration command to configure the interval that the bridge waits to hear BPDUs from the spanning tree root. If the bridge does not hear BPDUs from the spanning tree root within this specified interval, it assumes that the network has changed and recomputes the spanning-tree topology.

bridge group max-age seconds


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group

seconds

Specifies the max-age interval in seconds (enter a value between 10 and 200 seconds)

 
Defaults

The default max-age is 15 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the max age for bridge group 1:

bridge(config)# bridge 1 max-age 20

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge aging-time

Specifies the length of time that a dynamic entry can remain in the bridge table from the time the entry is created or last updated

bridge forward-time

Specifies a forward delay interval on the bridge

bridge hello-time

Specifies the interval between the hello BPDUs

bridge priority

Specifies the bridge STP priority

bridge multiple-port client-vlan

To configure vlan-id in secondary ethernet port, use the bridge multiple-port client-vlan command in Interface configuration mode command.

bridge multiple-port client-vlan


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

client vlan

Specifies the VLAN ID of all the ethernet connected clients. Valid range is from 1 to 4095.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the vlan-id in secondary ethernet port.

ap(config-if)# bridge multiple-port client-vlan 495

 

bridge priority

Use the bridge priority global configuration command to configure the spanning tree priority for the bridge. STP uses the bridge priority to select the spanning tree root. The lower the priority, the more likely it is that the bridge will become the spanning tree root.

The radio and Ethernet interfaces and the native VLAN on the bridge are assigned to bridge group 1 by default. When you enable STP and assign a priority on bridge group 1, STP is enabled on the radio and Ethernet interfaces and on the primary VLAN, and those interfaces adopt the priority assigned to bridge group 1. You can create bridge groups for sub-interfaces and assign different STP settings to those bridge groups.

bridge group priority priority


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group to be configured

priority

Specifies the STP priority for the bridge

 
Defaults

The default bridge priority is 32768.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the priority for the bridge:

bridge(config-if)# bridge 1 priority 900

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge aging-time

Specifies the length of time that a dynamic entry can remain in the bridge table from the time the entry is created or last updated

bridge forward-time

Specifies a forward delay interval on the bridge

bridge hello-time

Specifies the interval between the hello BPDUs

bridge max-age

Specifies the interval that the bridge waits to hear BPDUs from the spanning tree root

bridge protocol ieee

Use the bridge number protocol ieee global configuration command to enable Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on the bridge. STP is enabled for all interfaces assigned to the bridge group that you specify in the command.

The radio and Ethernet interfaces and the native VLAN on the bridge are assigned to bridge group 1 by default. When you enable STP and assign a priority on bridge group 1, STP is enabled on the radio and Ethernet interfaces and on the primary VLAN, and those interfaces adopt the priority assigned to bridge group 1. You can create bridge groups for sub-interfaces and assign different STP settings to those bridge groups.

bridge number protocol ieee [suspend]


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

number

Specifies the bridge group for which STP is enabled

suspend

Suspends STP on the bridge until you re-enable it.

 
Defaults

STP is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable STP for bridge group 1:

bridge(config)# bridge 1 protocol ieee

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge aging-time

Specifies the length of time that a dynamic entry can remain in the bridge table from the time the entry is created or last updated

bridge forward-time

Specifies a forward delay interval on the bridge

bridge hello-time

Specifies the interval between the hello BPDUs

bridge max-age

Specifies the interval that the bridge waits to hear BPDUs from the spanning tree root

bridge-group block-unknown-source

Use the bridge-group block-unknown-source configuration interface command to block traffic from unknown MAC addresses on a specific interface. Use the no form of the command to disable unknown source blocking on a specific interface.

For STP to function properly, block-unknown-source must be disabled for interfaces participating in STP.

bridge-group group block-unknown-source

 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group to be configured

 
Defaults

When you enable STP on an interface, block unknown source is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to disable block unknown source for bridge group 2:

bridge(config-if)# no bridge-group 2 block-unknown-source
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge-group path-cost

Specifies the path cost for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group port-protected

Enables protected port for public secure mode configuration

bridge-group priority

Specifies the spanning tree priority for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group spanning-disabled

Disables STP on a specific interface

bridge-group subscriber-loop-control

Enables loop control on virtual circuits associated with a bridge group

bridge-group unicast-flooding

Enables unicast flooding for a specific interface

bridge-group path-cost

Use the bridge-group path-cost configuration interface command to configure the path cost for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) uses the path cost to calculate the shortest distance from the bridge to the spanning tree root.

bridge-group group path-cost cost


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group to be configured

cost

Specifies the path cost for the bridge group

 
Defaults

The default path cost for the Ethernet interface is 19, and the default path cost for the radio interface is 33.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the path cost for bridge group 2:

bridge(config-if)# bridge-group 2 path-cost 25
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge-group block-unknown-source

Blocks traffic from unknown MAC addresses on a specific interface

bridge-group port-protected

Enables protected port for public secure mode configuration

bridge-group priority

Specifies the spanning tree priority for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group spanning-disabled

Disables STP on a specific interface

bridge-group subscriber-loop-control

Enables loop control on virtual circuits associated with a bridge group

bridge-group unicast-flooding

Enables unicast flooding for a specific interface

bridge-group port-protected

Use the bridge-group port-protected configuration interface command to enable protected port for public secure mode configuration. In Cisco IOS software, there is no exchange of unicast, broadcast, or multicast traffic between protected ports.

bridge-group bridge-group
port-protected

 
Syntax Description

bridge-group

Specifies the bridge group for port protection

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable protected port for bridge group 71:

AP(config-if)# bridge-group 71 port-protected
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge-group block-unknown-source

Blocks traffic from unknown MAC addresses on a specific interface

bridge-group path-cost

Specifies the path cost for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group priority

Specifies the spanning tree priority for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group spanning-disabled

Disables STP on a specific interface

bridge-group subscriber-loop-control

Enables loop control on virtual circuits associated with a bridge group

bridge-group unicast-flooding

Enables unicast flooding for a specific interface

bridge-group priority

Use the bridge-group priority configuration interface command to configure the spanning tree priority for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) uses the interface priority to select the root interface on the bridge.

The radio and Ethernet interfaces and the native VLAN on the bridge are assigned to bridge group 1 by default. When you enable STP and assign a priority on bridge group 1, STP is enabled on the radio and Ethernet interfaces and on the primary VLAN, and those interfaces adopt the priority assigned to bridge group 1. You can create bridge groups for sub-interfaces and assign different STP settings to those bridge groups.

bridge-group group priority priority

 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group to be configured

priority

Specifies the STP priority for the bridge group

 
Defaults

The default priority for both the Ethernet and radio interfaces is 128.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the priority for an interface on bridge group 2:

bridge(config-if)# bridge-group 2 priority 150
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge-group block-unknown-source

Blocks traffic from unknown MAC addresses on a specific interface

bridge-group path-cost

Specifies the path cost for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group port-protected

Enables protected port for public secure mode configuration

bridge-group spanning-disabled

Disables STP on a specific interface

bridge-group subscriber-loop-control

Enables loop control on virtual circuits associated with a bridge group

bridge-group unicast-flooding

Enables unicast flooding for a specific interface

bridge-group spanning-disabled

Use the bridge-group spanning-disabled configuration interface command to disable Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on a specific interface. Use the no form of the command to enable STP on a specific interface.

For STP to function properly, spanning-disabled must be disabled for interfaces participating in STP.

bridge-group group spanning-disabled

 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group to be configured

 
Defaults

STP is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to disable STP for bridge group 2:

bridge(config-if)# bridge-group 2 spanning-disabled
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge-group block-unknown-source

Blocks traffic from unknown MAC addresses on a specific interface

bridge-group path-cost

Specifies the path cost for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group port-protected

Enables protected port for public secure mode configuration

bridge-group priority

Specifies the spanning tree priority for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group subscriber-loop-control

Enables loop control on virtual circuits associated with a bridge group

bridge-group unicast-flooding

Enables unicast flooding for a specific interface

bridge-group subscriber-loop-control

Use the bridge-group subscriber-loop-control configuration interface command to enable loop control on virtual circuits associated with a bridge group. Use the no form of the command to disable loop control on virtual circuits associated with a bridge group.

For Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) to function properly, subscriber-loop-control must be disabled for interfaces participating in STP.

bridge-group group subscriber-loop-control

 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group to be configured

 
Defaults

When you enable STP for an interface, subscriber loop control is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to disable subscriber loop control for bridge group 2:

bridge(config-if)# no bridge-group 2 subscriber-loop-control
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge-group block-unknown-source

Blocks traffic from unknown MAC addresses on a specific interface

bridge-group path-cost

Specifies the path cost for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group port-protected

Enables protected port for public secure mode configuration

bridge-group priority

Specifies the spanning tree priority for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group spanning-disabled

Disables STP on a specific interface

bridge-group unicast-flooding

Enables unicast flooding for a specific interface

bridge-group unicast-flooding

Use the bridge-group unicast-flooding configuration interface command to enable unicast flooding for a specific interface. Use the no form of the command to disable unicast flooding for a specific interface.

bridge-group group unicast-flooding

 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the bridge group to be configured

 
Defaults

Unicast flooding is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure unicast flooding for bridge group 2:

bridge(config-if)# bridge-group 2 unicast-flooding
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

bridge-group block-unknown-source

Blocks traffic from unknown MAC addresses on a specific interface

bridge-group path-cost

Specifies the path cost for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group port-protected

Enables protected port for public secure mode configuration

bridge-group priority

Specifies the spanning tree priority for the bridge Ethernet and radio interfaces

bridge-group spanning-disabled

Disables STP on a specific interface

bridge-group subscriber-loop-control

Enables loop control on virtual circuits associated with a bridge group

broadcast-key

Use the broadcast-key configuration interface command to configure the time interval between rotations of the broadcast encryption key used for clients. Use the no form of the command to disable broadcast key rotation.

[no] broadcast-key
[vlan
vlan-id ]
[change secs]
[ membership-termination ]
[ capability-change ]


Note Client devices using static WEP cannot use the access point when you enable broadcast key rotation. When you enable broadcast key rotation, only wireless client devices using 802.1x authentication (such as LEAP, EAP-TLS, or PEAP) can use the access point.



Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the virtual LAN identification value

change secs

(Optional) Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) between the rotation of the broadcast encryption key

membership-termination

(Optional) If WPA authenticated key management is enabled, this option specifies that the access point generates and distributes a new group key when any authenticated client device disassociates from the access point. If clients roam frequently among access points, enabling this feature might generate significant overhead.

capability-change

(Optional) If WPA authenticated key management is enabled, this option specifies that the access point generates and distributes a dynamic group key when the last non-key management (static WEP) client disassociates, and it distributes the statically configured WEP key when the first non-key management (static WEP) client authenticates. In WPA migration mode, this feature significantly improves the security of key-management capable clients when there are no static-WEP clients associated to the access point.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure vlan10 to support broadcast key encryption with a 5-minute key rotation interval:

AP(config-if)# broadcast-key vlan 10 change 300
 

This example shows how to disable broadcast key rotation:

AP(config-if)# no broadcast-key
 

cache authentication profile

Use the cache authentication profile server configuration command to configure the cache authentication profile. Use the no form of the command to disable the cache authentication profile.

[no] cache authentication profile name


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies the name of the cache authentication profile.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Server group configuration.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a RADIUS cache authentication profile:

AP(config)# aaa group server radius rad_admin
AP(config-sg-radius)# server 10.19.21.105
AP(config-sg-radius)# cache expiry 5
AP(config-sg-radius)# cache authentication profile admin_cache
 

This example shows how to to configure a TACACS+ cache authentication profile:

AP(config)# aaa group server tacacs+ tac_admin
AP(config-sg-tacacs+)# server 10.19.21.125
AP(config-sg-tacacs+)# cache expiry 5
AP(config-sg-tacacs+)# cache authentication profile admin_cache
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

aaa authentication login default local cache

Sets local cache for AAA authentication login.

aaa authorization exec default local cache

Sets local cache for the AAA authorization exec mode.

aaa cache profile

Sets the AAA cache profile name.

cache authorization profile

Sets the cache authorization profile name.

cache expiry

Sets the expiration time for the server group cache.

cache authorization profile

Use the cache authorization profile server configuration command to configure the cache authorization profile. Use the no form of the command to disable the cache authorization profile.

[no] cache authorization profile name


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies the name of the cache authorization profile.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Server group configuration.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a RADIUS cache authorization profile:

AP(config)# aaa group server radius rad_admin
AP(config-sg-radius)# server 10.19.21.105
AP(config-sg-radius)# cache expiry 5
AP(config-sg-radius)# cache authorization profile admin_cache
 

This example shows how to to configure a TACACS+ cache authorization profile:

AP(config)# aaa group server tacacs+ tac_admin
AP(config-sg-tacacs+)# server 10.19.21.125
AP(config-sg-tacacs+)# cache expiry 5
AP(config-sg-tacacs+)# cache authorization profile admin_cache
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

aaa authentication login default local cache

Sets local cache for AAA authentication login.

aaa authorization exec default local cache

Sets local cache for the AAA authorization exec mode.

aaa cache profile

Sets the AAA cache profile name.

cache authentication profile

Sets the cache authentication profile name.

cache expiry

Sets the expiration time for the server group cache.

cache expiry

Use the cache expiry server group configuration command to configure the expiration time of the server group cache. Use the no form of the command to disable the cache expiration.

[no] cache expiry hours [enforce | failover]


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

hours

Specifies the amount of time (in hours) before the cache expires. Enter a number from 0 to 2147483647. Zero specifies the cache never expires.

enforce

(Optional) Specifies not to use an expired entry.

failover

(Optional) Specifies that an expired entry is used if all other methods fail.

 
Defaults

The default cache expiration time is 24 hours.

 
Command Modes

Server group configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a RADIUS cache expiration time of 5 hours:

AP(config)# aaa group server radius rad_admin
AP(config-sg-radius)# server 10.19.21.105
AP(config-sg-radius)# cache expiry 5
 

This example shows how to to configure a TACACS+ cache expiration time of 5 hours:

AP(config)# aaa group server tacacs+ tac_admin
AP(config-sg-tacacs+)# server 10.19.21.125
AP(config-sg-tacacs+)# cache expiry 5
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

aaa authentication login default local cache

Sets local cache for AAA authentication login.

aaa authorization exec default local cache

Sets local cache for the AAA authorization exec mode.

aaa cache profile

Sets the AAA cache profile name.

cache authentication profile

Sets the cache authentication profile name.

cache authorization profile

Sets the cache authorization profile name.

cca

Use the cca configuration interface command to configure the clear channel assessment (CCA) noise floor level for the bridge radio. The value you enter is used as an absolute value of dBm.

cca number


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

number

Specifies the radio noise floor in dBm. Enter a number from –60 to 0. Zero configures the radio to use a received validate frame as the CCA indication.

 
Defaults

The default CCA level is –62 dBm.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the CCA level for the bridge radio:

bridge(config-if)# cca 50
 

 

cca-threshold

Use the cca-threshold command to add the value of the Clear Channel Assessment (CCA) threshold. This is the threshold above which the radio considers the channel to be clear, especially for transmission.

cca-threshold threshold-value

 
Syntax Description

threshold-value

Specifies the CCA threshold value.

For example if you configure the cca-threshold as

ap(config-if)# cca-threshold 77

This sets the CCA threshold to -77 dBm, which means that the AP transmits a frame only if the background energy level on the channel is below -77 dBm. Therefore, if there is an 802.11 transmission in another cell (co-channel interference) that is received at -73 dBm, this radio will not attempt to transmit. However, if the co-channel interference is at -79 dBm, the radio considers the channel to be clear, and so will transmit frames.

 
Defaults

The default value is -82 dBm.

 
Command Modes

Radio Interface mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

(15.3(3)JF4)

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to add value to the CCA threshold in the radio interface configuration mode:
 
AP(config-if)#cca-threshold 77

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays the radio interface configuration and statistics

channel

Use the channel configuration interface command to set the radio channel frequency and the 802.11n radio channel width. Use the no form of this command to reset the channel frequency to defaults.

[no] channel { number | frequency | least-congested | width [20] [40-above] [40-below] | dfs}

802.11n allows both 20-MHz and 40-Mhz channel widths consisting of 2 contiguous non-overlapping channels (for example, 2.4-GHz channels 1 and 6)


Note This command is disabled on 5-GHz radios that support Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). All 5-GHz radios configured at the factory for use in the European Union and Signapore support DFS. Radios configured for use in other regulatory domains do not support DFS.


 
Syntax Description

number

Specifies a channel number. For a list of channels for the 2.4-GHz radio, see Table 2-1 . For a list of channels for the 5-GHz radio, see Table 2-2 .

Note The valid numbers depend on the channels allowed in your regulatory region and are set during manufacturing. For additional information, refer to the hardware installation guide for your access point or bridge.

frequency

Specifies the center frequency for the radio channel. For a list of center frequencies for the 2.4-GHz access point radio, see Table 2-1 . For a list of center frequencies for the 5-GHz access point radio, see Table 2-2 . For a list of center frequencies for the 5-GHz bridge radio, see Table 2-3 .

Note The valid frequencies depend on the channels allowed in your regulatory region and are set during manufacturing. For additional information, refer to the hardware installation guide for your access point or bridge.

least-congested

Enables or disables the scanning for a least busy radio channel to communicate with the client adapter

width [20] [40-above] [40-below]

Specifies a channel width. One of the 20-MHz channels is called the control channel. Legacy clients and 20-MHz high throughput clients use the control channel. Beacons can only be sent on this channel. The second 20-MHz channel is called the extension channel. 40-MHz stations may use this channel and the control channel simultaneously.

Use the width option to specify a bandwidth to use. This option is available for the 1250 series access point and consists of three available settings: 20, 40-above, and 40-below. Choosing 20 sets the channel width to 20 MHz. Choosing 40-above sets the channel width to 40 Mhz with the extension channel above the control channel. Choosing 40-below sets the channel width to 40 MHz with the extension channel below the control channel.

dfs

Enables Dynamic Frequency Selection.

 

Table 2-1 Channels and Center Frequencies for 2.4-GHz Radios (both 802.11b and 802.11g)

Channel Identifier
Frequency
(MHz)
Channel Identifier
Frequency
(MHz)

1

2412

 

8

2447

2

2417

 

9

2452

3

2422

 

10

2457

4

2427

 

11

2462

5

2432

 

12

2467

6

2437

 

13

2472

7

2442

 

14

2484

 

Table 2-2 Channels and Center Frequencies for Access Point 5-GHz Radios

Channel Identifier
Frequency
(MHz)
Channel Identifier
Frequency
(MHz)
Channel Identifier
Frequency
(MHz)

34

5170

 

100

5500

 

149

5745

36

5180

 

104

5520

 

153

5765

38

5190

 

108

5540

 

157

5785

40

5200

 

112

5560

 

161

5805

42

5210

 

116

5580

 

165

5825

44

5220

 

120

5600

 

46

5230

 

124

5620

 

48

5240

 

128

5640

 

52

5260

 

132

5660

 

56

5280

 

136

5680

 

60

5300

 

140

5700

 

64

5320

 

 

 

Table 2-3 Channels and Center Frequencies for the 1400 Series Bridge 5-GHz Radio

Channel Identifier
Frequency
(MHz)

149

5745

153

5765

157

5785

161

5805

 
Defaults

The default channel setting is least-congested.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(8)JA

Parameters were added to support the 5-GHz access point radio.

12.2(11)JA

Parameters were added to support the 5-GHz bridge radio.

12.4(10b)JA

The width option was added to support 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz 802.11n radios.

Examples

This example shows how to set the access point radio to channel 10 with a center frequency of 2457.

AP(config-if)# channel 2457
 

This example shows how to set the access point to scan for the least-congested radio channel.

AP(config-if)# channel least-congested
 

This example shows how to set the frequency to the default setting:

AP(config-if)# no channel

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show controllers dot11radio

Displays the radio controller information and status

channel-match (LBS configuration mode)

Use the channel-match location based services (LBS) configuration mode command to specify that the LBS packet sent by an LBS tag must match the radio channel on which the access point receives the packet. If the channel used by the tag and the channel used by the access point do not match, the access point drops the packet.

[no] channel-match

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The channel match option is enabled by default.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the channel match option for an LBS profile:

ap(dot11-lbs)# channel-match
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 lbs

Creates an LBS profile and enters LBS configuration mode

interface dot11 (LBS configuration mode)

Enables an LBS profile on a radio interface

method (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the location method used in an LBS profile

multicast address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the multicast address that LBS tag devices use when they send LBS packets

packet-type (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the LBS packet type accepted in an LBS profile

server-address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the IP address of the location server on your network

class-map

Use the class-map global configuration command to create a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete an existing class map and return to global configuration mode.

[no] class-map name

 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies the name of the class map

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults, and there is not a default class map.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to specify the name of the class for which you want to create or modify class-map match criteria and to enter class-map configuration mode. In this mode, you can enter one match command to configure the match criterion for this class.

The class-map command and its subcommands are used to define packet classification, marking, and aggregate policing as part of a globally named service policy applied on a per-interface basis.

After you are in quality of service (QoS) class-map configuration mode, these configuration commands are available:

  • description : describes the class map (up to 200 characters). The show class-map privileged EXEC command displays the description and the name of the class-map.
  • exit : exits from QoS class-map configuration mode.
  • match : configures classification criteria. For more information, see the match (class-map configuration) command.
  • no : removes a match statement from a class map.
  • rename : renames the current class map. If you rename a class map with a name already in use, the message A class-map with this name already exists is displayed.

Only one match criterion per class map is supported. For example, when defining a class map, only one match command can be issued.

Because only one match command per class map is supported, the match-all and match-any keywords function the same.

Only one access control list (ACL) can be configured in a class map. The ACL can have multiple access control entries (ACEs).

Examples

This example shows how to configure the class map called class1. class1 has one match criterion, which is an access list called 103.

AP(config)# access-list 103 permit any any dscp 10
AP(config)# class-map class1
AP(config-cmap)# match access-group 103
AP(config-cmap)# exit
 

This example shows how to delete the class map class1 :

AP(config)# no class-map class1
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

match (class-map configuration)

Defines the match criteria ACLs, IP precedence, or IP Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values to classify traffic

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces to specify a service policy

show class-map

Displays QoS class maps

clear dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Use the clear dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache privileged EXEC command to clear entries from the MAC authentication cache.

clear dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache [address]

 
Syntax Description

address

Specifies a specific MAC address to clear from the cache.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear a specific MAC address from the MAC authentication cache:

ap# clear dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache 7643.798a.87b2
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 activity-timeout

Enable MAC authentication caching on the access point.

show dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Display MAC addresses in the MAC authentication cache.

clear dot11 cckm-statistics

Use the clear dot11 cckm-statistics privileged EXEC command to reset CCKM statistics.

clear dot11 cckm-statistics

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear CCKM statistics:

AP# clear dot11 cckm-statistics
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 associations

Displays association information for 802.11 devices

clear dot11 client

Use the clear dot11 client privileged EXEC command to deauthenticate a radio client with a specified MAC address. The client must be directly associated with the access point, not a repeater.

clear dot11 client { mac-address }

 
Syntax Description

mac-address

Specifies a radio client MAC address (in xxxx.xxxx.xxxx format)

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to deauthenticate a specific radio client:

AP# clear dot11 client 0040.9645.2196
 

You can verify that the client was deauthenticated by entering the following privileged EXEC command:

AP# show dot11 associations 0040.9645.2196

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 associations

Displays the radio association table or optionally displays association statistics or association information about repeaters or clients

clear dot11 hold-list

Use the clear dot11 hold-list privileged EXEC command to reset the MAC, LEAP, and EAP authentications hold list.

clear dot11 hold-list

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear the hold-off list of MAC authentications:

AP# clear dot11 hold-list

clear dot11 next-aps

To reset the next available access point, use the clear dot11 next-aps command in privileged EXEC mode.

clear dot11 next-aps

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear the hold-off list of MAC authentications:

AP# clear dot11 next-aps

clear dot11 statistics

Use the clear dot11 statistics privileged EXEC command to reset statistic information for a specific radio interface or for a particular client with a specified MAC address.

clear dot11 statistics
{interface | mac-address}

 
Syntax Description

interface

Specifies a radio interface number

mac-address

Specifies a client MAC address (in xxxx.xxxx.xxxx format)

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear radio statistics for radio interface 0:

AP# clear dot11 statistics dot11radio 0
 

This example shows how to clear radio statistics for the client radio with a MAC address of 0040.9631.81cf:

AP# clear dot11 statistics 0040.9631.81cf

 

You can verify that the radio interface statistics are reset by entering the following privileged EXEC command:

AP# show dot11 associations statistics

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 statistics client-traffic

Displays client traffic statistics

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays radio interface information

show interfaces dot11radio statistics

Displays radio interface statistics

clear dot11 ids mfp client statistics

Use th e clear dot11 ids mfp client statistics privileged EXEC command to clear MFP-2 statistics on the access point console.

clear dot11 ids mfp client statistics

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.5(3g)JA & 12.3(8)JEB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear ids mfp statistics:

AP# clear dot11 ids mfp statistics
 

clear eap sessions

Command
Description

show dot11 statistics client-traffic

Displays client traffic statistics

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays radio interface information

show interfaces dot11radio statistics

Displays radio interface statistics

Use the clear eap sessions privileged EXEC command to clear the EAP session information on the access point.

clear eap sessions
[credentials
profile name ]
[interface
name [number ]]
[method
name ]
[transport
name ]

 
Syntax Description

credentials profile name

Clears EAP session information for the credentials profile specified by profile name.

interface interface number

Clears EAP session information for the interface specified by name and number.

method name

Clears EAP session information for the EAP method specified by name.

transport name

Clears EAP session information for the EAP transport specified by name.

 
Defaults

Clears all session information on the access point.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear all the EAP session information on the access point:

AP# clear eap sessions
 

This command shows how to clear all EAP session information for the fast Ethernet interface:

AP# clear eap sessions interface fastethernet 0
 

This command shows how to clear all EAP session information for the EAP-FAST method:

AP# clear eap sessions method eap-fast

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show eap sessions

Displays all the EAP session information on the access point.

clear iapp rogue-ap-list

Use the clear iapp rogue-ap-list privileged EXEC command to clear the list of IAPP rogue access points.

clear iapp rogue-ap-list


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear the IAPP rogue access point list:

AP# clear iapp rogue-ap-list
 

You can verify that the rogue AP list was deleted by entering the show iapp rogue-ap-list privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show iapp rogue-ap-list

Displays the IAPP rogue access point list

clear iapp statistics

Use the clear iapp statistics privileged EXEC command to clear all the IAPP statistics.

clear iapp statistics

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear the IAPP statistics:

AP# clear iapp statistics
 

You can verify that the IAPP statistics were cleared by entering the following privileged EXEC command:

AP# show iapp statistics

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show iapp statistics

Displays the IAPP transmit and receive statistics

clear ip igmp snooping membership

Use the clear ip igmp snooping membership privileged EXEC command to reset IGMP host membership information on the access point.

clear ip igmp snooping membership
[vlan vlan id ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan id

Resets IGMP host membership information by VLAN.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to reset the IGMP membership information on the access point:

AP# clear ip igmp snooping membership
 

This example shows how to reset the IGMP membership information by vlan:

AP# clear ip igmp snooping membership vlan 1
 

 
Related CommandsT

Command
Description

show ip igmp snooping groups

Displays IGMP snooping group information.

ip igmp snooping vlan

Enables IGMP snooping for a Catalyst VLAN.

clear wlccp wds

Use the clear wlccp wds privileged EXEC command to clear WDS statistics and to remove devices from the WDS database.

clear wlccp wds {[ap [mac-address]] | [mn [mac-address]] | statistics |
aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache [mac-address]}

 
Syntax Description

ap [mac-address]

Removes access points from the WDS database. If you specify a MAC address (in the hhhh.hhhh.hhhh format), the command removes the specified device from the WDS database. If you do not specify a MAC address, the command removes all access points from the WDS database.

mn [mac-address]

Removes client devices (mobile nodes) from the WDS database. If you specify a MAC address (in the hhhh.hhhh.hhhh format), the command removes that device from the WDS database. If you do not specify a MAC address, the command removes all clients from the WDS database.

statistics

Resets all WDS statistics.

aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache [mac-address]

Removes MAC addresses from the access point’s MAC authentication filter cache. If you specify a MAC address (in the hhhh.hhhh.hhhh format), the command removes that device from the filter cache. If you do not specify a MAC address, the command removes all addresses from the cache.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to remove an access point from the WDS database:

AP# clear wlccp wds ap 1572.342d.97f4
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show wlccp

Displays information on devices participating in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM)

wlccp wds aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Enables MAC authentication caching on the access point

clear wlccp wds recovery statistics

Use the clear wlccp wds recovery statistics privileged EXEC command to clear WDS recovery statistics.

clear wlccp wds recovery statistics

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments of keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to clear the WDS recovery statistics:

AP# clear wlccp wds recovery statistics
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show wlccp

Displays information on devices participating in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM)

concatenation

Use the concatenation configuration interface command to enable packet concatenation on the bridge radio. Using concatenation, the bridge combines multiple packets into one packet to reduce packet overhead and overall latency, and to increase transmission efficiency.

concatenation [ bytes ]


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

bytes

(Optional) Specifies a maximum size for concatenated packets in bytes. Enter a value from 1600 to 4000.

 
Defaults

Concatenation is enabled by default, and the default maximum concatenated packet size is 3500.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure concatenation on the bridge radio:

bridge(config-if)# concatenation 4000
 

copy run scp://url

To perform secure copy, use the copy run scp://url command in configuration interface.

copy run scp ://url

 
Syntax Description

://url

Specifies the url.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to perform SCP:

AP(config)# copy run scp http://cisco.com

countermeasure tkip hold-time

Use the countermeasure tkip hold-time configuration interface command to configure a TKIP MIC failure holdtime. If the access point detects two MIC failures within 60 seconds, it blocks all the TKIP clients on that interface for the holdtime period.

countermeasure tkip hold-time seconds

 
Syntax Description

seconds

Specifies the length of the TKIP holdtime in seconds (if the holdtime is 0, TKIP MIC failure hold is disabled)

 
Defaults

TKIP holdtime is enabled by default, and the default holdtime is 60 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the TKIP holdtime on the access point radio:

ap(config-if)# countermeasure tkip hold-time 120
 

crypto key generate rsa

To generate the RSA keys while configuring SSH, use the crypto key generate rsa command in privileged EXEC mode.

crypto key generate rsa

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments of keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to generate RSA keys:

AP# crypto key generate rsa

cw-max (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Use the cw-max QOS Class interface configuration mode command to configure the CAC 802.11 maximum contention window size for a radio interface. Use the no form of the command to remove the setting.

[no] cw-max 0-10

 
Syntax Description

0-10

Specifies the size of the maximum contention window.

 
Defaults

When QoS is enabled, the default cw-max settings for access points match the values in Table 2-4 , and the default cw-max settings for bridges match the values in Table 2-5 .

Table 2-4 Default QoS cw-max Definitions for Access Points

Class of Service
Max Contention Window

Background

10

Best Effort

10

Video <100ms Latency

5

Voice <100ms Latency

4

Table 2-5 Default QoS cw-max Definitions for Bridges

Class of Service
Max Contention Window

Background

10

Best Effort

10

Video <100ms Latency

4

Voice <100ms Latency

3

 
Command Modes

QOS Class interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the CAC 802.11 maximum contention window size for the radio interface:

AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# dot11 qos class voice
AP(config-if-qosclass)# cw-max 2
 

This example shows how to remove the CAC 802.11 maximum contention window for the radio interface:

AP(config-if-qosclass)# no cw-max
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admission-control (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC admission control is required for the radio interface.

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC traffic is enabled for the radio interface.

cw-min (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC minimum contention window size for the radio interface.

fixed-slot (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC fixed fallback slot time for the radio interface.

transmit-op (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC transmit opportunity time for the radio interface.

cw-min (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Use the cw-min QOS Class interface configuration mode command to configure the CAC 802.11 minimum contention window size for a radio interface. Use the no form of the command to remove the setting.

[no] cw-min 0-10

 
Syntax Description

0-10

Specifies the size of the maximum contention window.

 
Defaults

When QoS is enabled, the default cw-min settings for access points match the values in Table 2-6 , and the default cw-min settings for bridges match the values in Table 2-7 .

Table 2-6 Default QoS cw-min Definitions for Access Points

Class of Service
Max Contention Window

Background

5

Best Effort

5

Video <100ms Latency

4

Voice <100ms Latency

2

Table 2-7 Default QoS cw-min Definitions for Bridges

Class of Service
Min Contention Window

Background

4

Best Effort

4

Video <100ms Latency

3

Voice <100ms Latency

2

 
Command Modes

QOS Class interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the CAC 802.11 minimum contention window size for the radio interface:

AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# dot11 qos class voice
AP(config-if-qosclass)# cw-min 2
 

This example shows how to remove the CAC 802.11 minimum contention window for the radio interface:

AP(config-if-qosclass)# no cw-min
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admission-control (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC admission control is required for the radio interface.

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC traffic is enabled for the radio interface.

cw-max (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC maximum contention window size for the radio interface.

fixed-slot (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC fixed fallback slot time for the radio interface.

transmit-op (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC transmit opportunity time for the radio interface.

debug dot11

Use the debug dot11 privileged EXEC command to begin debugging of radio functions. Use the no form of this command to stop the debug operation.

[no] debug dot11
{ events | packets | forwarding | mgmt | network-map | virtual-interface | nextap}

 
Syntax Description

events

Activates debugging of all radio related events

packets

Activates debugging of radio packets received and transmitted

forwarding

Activates debugging of radio forwarded packets

mgmt

Activates debugging of radio access point management activity

network-map

Activates debugging of radio association management network map

virtual-interface

Activates debugging of radio virtual interfaces

nextap

Activates debugging of the next AP

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.3(8)JED

This command was modified.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging of all radio-related events:

AP# debug dot11 events
 

This example shows how to begin debugging of radio packets:

AP# debug dot11 packets
 

This example shows how to stop debugging of all radio related events:

AP# no debug dot11 events

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

 

 

 

debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays configuration and status information for the radio interface

debug dot11 aaa

Use the debug dot11 aaa privileged EXEC command to activate debugging of dot11 authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) operations. Use the no form of this command to stop the debug operation.

[no] debug dot11 aaa
{ accounting | authenticator | dispatcher | manager }

 
Syntax Description

accounting

Activates debugging of 802.11 AAA accounting packets

authenticator
{ all | dispatcher | mac-authen | process | rxdata | state-machine | txdata }

Activates debugging of MAC and EAP authentication packets. Use these options to activate authenticator debugging:

  • all—activates debugging for all authenticator packets
  • dispatcher—activates debugging for authentication request handler packets
  • mac-authen—activates debugging for MAC authentication packets
  • process—activates debugging for authenticator process packets
  • rxdata—activates debugging for EAPOL packets from client devices
  • state-machine—activates debugging for authenticator state-machine packets
  • txdata—activates debugging for EAPOL packets sent to client devices

dispatcher

Activates debugging of 802.11 AAA dispatcher (interface between Association & Manager) packets

manager
{ all | dispatcher | keys | rxdata | state-machine | supplicant | txdata }

Activates debugging information for the AAA manager. Use these options to activate AAA manager debugging:

  • all—activates all AAA manager debugging
  • dispatcher—activates debug information for AAA manager-authenticator dispatch traffic
  • keys—activates debug information for AAA manager key processing
  • rxdata—activates debugging for AAA manager packets received from client devices
  • state-machine—activates debugging for AAA manager state-machine packets
  • supplicant—activates debugging for LEAP supplicant packets
  • txdata—activates debugging for AAA manager packets sent to client devices

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(15)JA

This command was modified to include the accounting, authenticator, dispatcher, and manager debugging options.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging of dot11 AAA accounting packets:

AP# debug dot11 aaa accounting
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings

show interfaces dot11radio aaa

Optionally displays all radio clients

debug dot11 autoconfigsm

To enable debugging of state machine transition, use the debug dot11 autoconfigsm command.

debug dot11 autoconfigsm

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(3)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate wireless IDS debugging for authentication events:

AP# debug dot11 autoconfigsm

debug dot11 autoconfigev

To enable debugging of an autoconfig event, use the debug dot11 autoconfigev command.

debug dot11 autoconfigev

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(3)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate wireless IDS debugging for authentication events:

AP# debug dot11 autoconfigsev

debug dot11 cac

Use the debug dot11 cac privileged EXEC command to begin debugging of admission control radio functions. Use the no form of this command to stop the debug operation.

[no] debug dot11 cac
{ events | unit }


Note This command is not supported on repeaters.


 
Syntax Description

events

Activates debugging of radio admission control events.

unit

Activates verbose debugging of radio admission control events.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging of all admission control radio-related events:

AP# debug dot11 cac events
 

This example shows how to begin verbose debugging of all admission control radio-related events:

AP# debug dot11 cac unit
 

This example shows how to stop debugging of all admission control radio-related events:

AP# debug dot11 cac events
 

This example shows how to stop verbose debugging of all admission control radio-related events:

AP# no debug dot11 cac unit

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admit-traffic (SSID configuration mode)

Enables CAC admission control for an SSID on the access point.

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Configures CAC admission control on the access point.

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show dot11 ids eap

Displays all CAC radio events on the access point.

traffic-stream

Configures CAC traffic data rates and priorities for a radio interface on the access point.

debug dot11 dot11radio

Use the debug dot11 dot11radio privileged EXEC command to turn on radio debug options. These options include run RF monitor mode and trace frames received or transmitted on the radio interface. Use the no form of this command to stop the debug operation.

[no] debug dot11 dot11radio interface-number { accept-radio-firmware |
monitor {ack | address | beacon | crc | lines | plcp | print | probe | store} |
print {hex | if | iv | lines | mic | plcp | printf | raw | shortadr} |
radio_debug flag-value | stop-on-failure |
trace {off | print | store |
}

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies a radio interface number (the 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0, and the 5-GHz radio is radio 1).

accept-radio-firmware

Configures the access point to disable checking the radio firmware version

monitor

Enables RF monitor mode. Use these options to turn on monitor modes:

  • ack—Displays ACK packets. ACK packets acknowledge receipt of a signal, information, or packet.
  • address—Displays packets to or from the specified IP address
  • beacon—Displays beacon packets
  • crc—Displays packets with CRC errors
  • lines—Specifies a print line count
  • plcp—Displays plcp packets
  • print—Enables RF monitor printing mode
  • probe—Displays probe packets
  • store—Enables RF monitor storage mode

print

Enables packet printing. Use these options to turn on packet printing:

  • hex—Prints entire packets without formatting
  • if—Prints the in and out interfaces for packets
  • iv—Prints the packet WEP IV
  • lines—Prints the line count for the trace
  • mic—Prints the Cisco MIC
  • plcp—Displays the PLCP
  • printf—Prints using printf instead of buginf
  • raw—Prints without formatting data
  • shortadr—Prints MAC addresses in short form

stop-on-failure

Configures the access point to not restart when the radio driver fails

trace

Enables trace mode. Use these options to turn on trace modes:

  • off—Turns off traces
  • print—Enables trace printing
  • store—Enables trace storage

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable packet printing with MAC addresses in short form:

AP# debug dot11 dot11radio 0 print shortadr
 

This example shows how to begin monitoring of all packets with CRC errors:

AP# debug dot11 dot11radio 0 monitor crc
 

This example shows how to stop monitoring of packets with CRC errors:

AP# no debug dot11 dot11radio 0 monitor crc

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays configuration and status information for the radio interface

show interfaces dot11radio statistics

Displays radio interface statistics

debug dot11 ft

To enable debugging of 802.11r Fast BSS Transition, use the debug dot11 ft command in privileged EXEC mode. Use the no form of this command to disable Fast BSS Transition debugging.

[no] debug dot11 ft

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate wireless IDS debugging for authentication events:

AP# debug dot11 ft

debug dot11 ft-scan

To enable debugging of 802.11r Fast BSS Transition scan, use the debug dot11 ft-scan command in privileged EXEC mode. Use the no form of this command to disable Fast BSS Transition debugging.

[no] debug dot11 ft-scan

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate wireless IDS debugging for authentication events:

AP# debug dot11 ft-scan

debug dot11 ids

Use the debug dot11 ids eap privileged EXEC command to enable debugging for wireless IDS monitoring. Use the no form of the command to disable IDS debugging.

[no] debug dot11 ids {eap | cipher-errors}


Note This command is not supported on 1400 series bridges.


 
Syntax Description

eap

Activates debugging of IDS authentication events

cipher-errors

Activates debugging of cipher errors detected by IDS

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate wireless IDS debugging for authentication events:

AP# debug dot11 ids eap
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 ids eap attempts

Configures limits on authentication attempts and EAPOL flooding on scanner access points in monitor mode

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show dot11 ids eap

Displays wireless IDS statistics

debug dot11 ids mfp

Use the debug dot11 ids mfp privileged EXEC command to debug Management Frame Protection (MFP) operations on the access point.

[no] debug dot11 ids mfp
ap {all |detector | events |generator | io}
wds {all | detectors | events | generators | statistics}|
wlccp

 
Syntax Description

ap

Debugs MFP events on the access point.

all

Debugs all MFP events.

detectors

Debugs MFP detector key management events.

events

Debugs high level MFP events.

generators

Debugs MFP generator key management events.

io

Debugs MFP IO (generate or detect frame) events.

reporting

Debugs MFP reporting events.

statistics

Debugs MFP WDS statistics received from the detectors.

wds

Debugs MFP WDS events.

wlccp

Debugs MFP WLCCP messages.

 
Defaults

There are no defaults for this command.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to debug the MFP detectors on the access point:

ap(config)# debug dot11 ids mfp ap detectors
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 ids mfp

Configures MFP parameters on the access point.

show dot11 ids mfp

Displays MFP parameters on the access point.

debug eap

To display information about Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), use the debug eap command in privileged EXEC mode. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

[no] debug eap {all | authenticator | errors | events | fast | gtc | leap | md5 | mschapv2 |
packets | peer | sm | tls}

 
Syntax Description

all

Turns on debugging for all EAP information.

authenticator

Turns on debugging for EAP authenticator.

errors

Displays information about EAP packet errors.

events

Displays information about EAP events.

fast

Turns on debugging for EAP-FAST authentications.

gtc

Turns on debugging for EAP-GTC authentications.

leap

Turns on debugging for EAP-LEAP authentications.

md5

Turns on debugging for EAP-MD5 authentications.

mschapv2

Turns on debugging for EAP-MSCHAPV2 authentications.

packets

Displays EAP packet-related information.

peer

Turns on debugging for peer EAP authentications.

sm

Displays EAP state machine transitions.

tls

Turns on debugging for EAP-TLS authentications.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate debugging for EAP-FAST authentication events:

AP# debug eap fast all
 

This example shows how to deactivate EAP-FAST authentication debugging:

AP# no debug eap fast all
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

debug iapp

Use the debug iapp privileged EXEC command to begin debugging of IAPP operations. Use the no form of this command to stop the debug operation.

[no] debug iapp
{ packets | event | error }

 
Syntax Description

packets

Displays IAPP packets sent and received by the access point. Link test packets are not displayed

event

Displays significant IAPP events

error

Displays IAPP software and protocol errors

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging of IAPP packets:

AP# debug iapp packet
 

This example shows how to begin debugging of IAPP events:

AP# debug iapp events
 

This example shows how to begin debugging of IAPP errors:

AP# debug iapp errors

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings

debug l2tp packet

To debug control channel exchanges, use debug l2tp packet command.

debug l2tp packet event | error

 
Syntax Description

event

Displays significant l2tp events

error

Displays l2tp software and protocol errors

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(3)JAB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging of L2TP packets:

AP# debug l2tp packet event

debug radius local-server

To control the display of debug messages for the local authenticator, use the debug radius local-server command.

debug radius local-server {client | eapfast | error | packets }

 
Syntax Description

Command
Description

client

Activates display of error messages related to failed client authentications to the local authenticator

eapfast {encryption | events | pac | pkts}

Activates display of messages related to EAP-FAST on the local authenticator.

  • encryption—displays encryption and decryption of packets sent and received
  • events—displays EAP-FAST events on the local authenticator
  • pac—displays PAC generations and verifications
  • pkts—displays packets received and transmitted from EAP-FAST clients

error

Activates display of error messages related to the local authenticator

packets

Activates display of the content of RADIUS packets sent from and received by the local authenticator

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was first introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging for local authenticator errors:

AP# debug radius local-server error
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

radius-server local

Enables the access point as a local authenticator

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

debug vpdn packet

To debug data packets via tunnel, use debug vpdn packet command.

debug vpdn packet event | error

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(3)JAB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging of L2TP packets:

AP# debug vpdn packet

debug wlccp ap

Use the debug wlccp ap privileged EXEC command to enable debugging for devices that interact with the access point that provides wireless domain services (WDS).

debug wlccp ap {mn | rm [statistics | context | packet] | state | wds-discovery}


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

Command
Description

mn

(Optional) Activates display of debug messages related to client devices

rm [statistics | context | packet]

(Optional) Activates display of debug messages related to radio management

  • statistics—shows statistics related to radio management
  • context—shows the radio management contexts
  • packet—shows output related to packet flow

state

(Optional) Activates display of debug messages related to access point authentication to the WDS access point

wds-discovery

(Optional) Activates display of debug messages related to the WDS discovery process

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was first introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging for LEAP-enabled client devices participating in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM):

AP# debug wlccp ap mn
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show wlccp

Displays WLCCP information

debug wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor-list

Use the debug wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor-list privileged EXEC command to enable internal debugging information and error messages of the Enhanced Neighbor List feature. Use the no form of the command to disable the debugging and error messages.

[no] debug wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor-list


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was first introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate debugging and error messages of the Enhanced Neighbor List feature on the access point:

AP# debug wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor-list
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show wlccp

Displays WLCCP information

show wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor-list

Displays Enhanced Neighbor List feature related information.

debug wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor list

 

debug wlccp packet

Use the debug wlccp packet privileged EXEC command to activate display of packets to and from the access point that provides wireless domain services (WDS).

debug wlccp packet


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was first introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate display of packets to and from the WDS access point:

AP# debug wlccp packet
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show wlccp

Displays WLCCP information

debug wlccp rmlib

Use the debug wlccp rmlib privileged EXEC command to activate display of radio management library functions on the access point that provides wireless domain services (WDS).

debug wlccp rmlib


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was first introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate display of radio management library functions on the access point that provides WDS:

AP# debug wlccp rmlib
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show wlccp

Displays WLCCP information

debug wlccp wds

Use the debug wlccp wds privileged EXEC command to activate display of wireless domain services (WDS) debug messages.

debug wlccp wds
aggregator [packet]
authenticator {all | dispatcher | mac-authen | process | rxdata | state-machine | txdata}
nm [packet | loopback]
state
statistics


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

Command
Description

aggregator [packet]

(Optional) Activates display of debug messages related to radio management. Use the packet option to display packets from and to the radio management aggregator.

authenticator {all | dispatcher | mac-authen | process | rxdata | state-machine | txdata}

(Optional) Use this command and its options to turn on display of WDS debug messages related to authentication.

  • all—Enables all authenticator debugging
  • dispatcher—Enables debugging related to handling authentication requests
  • mac-authen—Enables debugging related to MAC address authentication
  • process—Enables debugging related to authenticator processes
  • rxdata—Enables display of EAPOL packets from clients
  • state-machine—Enables authenticator state-machine debugging
  • txdata—Enables display of EAPOL packets to clients

nm [packet | loopback]

(Optional) Activates display of debug messages from the wireless network manager (WNM). The packet option displays Cisco IOS packets from and to the network manager, and the loopback option re-routes packets sent to the WNM to the WDS access point console instead.

state

(Optional) Activates display of state transitions for access points interacting with the WDS access point.

statistics

(Optional) Activates display of WDS statistics.

 
Defaults

Debugging is not enabled.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was first introduced.

12.2(13)JA

This command was modified to include the aggregator and nm options.

Examples

This example shows how to begin debugging for LEAP-enabled client devices participating in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM):

AP# debug wlccp ap mn
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show wlccp

Displays WLCCP information

description (dot1x credentials configuration mode)

Use the description dot1x credentials configuration mode command to specify a text description for the dot1x credential. Use the no form of the command to disable anonymous-id.

[no] description name

 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies the text description for the dot1x credential.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Dot1x credentials configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify text description for the dot1x credential:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# description This is a test credential
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x credentials

Configures the dot1x credentials on the access point.

show dot1x credentials

Displays the configured dot1x credentials on the access point.

dfs band

Use the dfs band configuration interface command to prevent the access point from automatically selecting specific groups of 5-GHz channels during dynamic frequency selection (DFS). Use the no form of the command to unblock groups of channels.

[no] dfs band [1] [2] [3] [4] block


Note This command is supported only on 5-GHz radios configured at the factory for use in the European Union and Signapore.


 
Syntax Description

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Specifies a group of channels to be blocked from auto-selection during DFS.

  • 1—Specifies frequencies 5.150 to 5.250 GHz. This group of frequencies is also known as the UNII-1 band.
  • 2—Specifies frequencies 5.250 to 5.350 GHz. This group of frequencies is also known as the UNII-2 band.
  • 3—Specifies frequencies 5.470 to 5.725 GHz.
  • 4—Specifies frequencies 5.725 to 5.825 GHz. This group of frequencies is also known as the UNII-3 band.

 
Defaults

By default, dfs band 3 is blocked.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.4(3g)JA & 12.3(8)JEB

This command was modified to provide backward compatibility with clients that do not yet support the new channels in band 3.

Examples

This example shows how to prevent the access point from selecting frequencies 5.150 to 5.350 GHz during DFS:

ap(config-if)# dfs band 1 2 block
 

This example shows how to unblock frequencies 5.150 to 5.350 for DFS:

ap(config-if)# no dfs band 1 2 block
 

 

This example shows how to unblock all frequencies for DFS:

ap(config-if)# no dfs band block
 

 
Usage Guidelines

Some regulatory domains limit the 5-GHz channels that can be used in specific locations; for example, indoors or outdoors. Use the dfs band command to comply with the regulations in your regulatory domain.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

channel

Specifies the radio frequency on which a radio interface operates

distance

To specify the distance from a root bridge to the non-root bridge or bridges with which it communicate, use the distance configuration interface command. The distance setting adjusts the bridge’s timeout values to account for the time required for radio signals to travel from bridge to bridge. You do not need to adjust this setting on non-root bridges.

distance kilometers


Note This command is supported only on outdoor bridges.



Note If more than one non-root bridge communicates with the root bridge, enter the distance from the root bridge to the non-root bridge that is farthest away.


 
Syntax Description

kilometers

Specifies the bridge distance setting (enter a value from 0 to 99 km)

 
Defaults

In installation mode, the default distance setting is 99 km. In all other modes, such as root and non-root, the default distance setting is 0 km.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

15.2(4)JB

This command was modified.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the distance setting for the root bridge radio:

bridge(config-if)# distance 40
 

dot11 aaa authentication attributes service

Use the dot11 aaa authentication attributes service global configuration command to set the service-type attribute in reauthentication requests. By default, the access point sends reauthentication requests to the authentication server with the service-type attribute set to authenticate-only. However, some Microsoft IAS servers do not support the authenticate-only service-type attribute. Depending on the user requirements, set the service-type attribute to login-user or framed-user.

dot11 aaa authentication attributes service [login-user | framed-user]

 
Syntax Description

login-user

Specifies a service-type attribute of login-user.

framed-user

Specifies a service-type attribute of framed-user to support servers such as radius servers that do not support a login-user service-type.

 
Defaults

The default service-type attribute in authentication requests is login-user. The default service-type attribute in reauthentication requests is set to authenticate-only.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

12.4(25d)JA

This command was modified to introduce framed-user as a service-type option to support radius servers, which do not support the login-user service-type.

 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 aaa csid

Selects the format for MAC addresses in Called-Station-ID (CSID) and Calling-Station-ID attributes

dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Use the dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache global configuration command to enable MAC authentication caching on the access point. MAC authentication caching reduces overhead because the access point authenticates devices in its MAC-address cache without sending the request to your authentication server. When a client device completes MAC authentication to your authentication server, the access point adds the client’s MAC address to the cache.

dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache [timeout seconds]

 
Syntax Description

timeout seconds

Specifies a timeout value for MAC authentications in the cache.

 
Defaults

MAC authentication caching is disabled by default. When you enable it, the default timeout value is 1800 (30 minutes).

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure MAC authentication caching with a one-hour timeout:

ap(config)# dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache timeout 3600
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Clear MAC addresses from the MAC authentication cache.

show dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Display MAC addresses in the MAC authentication cache.

dot11 aaa csid

Use the dot11 aaa csid global configuration command to select the format for MAC addresses in Called-Station-ID (CSID) and Calling-Station-ID attributes in RADIUS packets.

dot11 aaa csid { default | ietf | unformatted }

 
Syntax Description

default

Specifies the default format for MAC addresses in CSID attributes. The default format looks like this example:

0007.85b3.5f4a

ietf

Specifies the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) format for MAC addresses in CSID attributes. The IETF format looks like this example:

00-07-85-b3-5f-4a

unformatted

Specifies no formatting for MAC addresses in CSID attributes. An unformatted MAC address looks like this example:

000785b35f4a

 
Defaults

The default CSID format looks like this example:

0007.85b3.5f4a

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can also use the wlccp wds aaa csid command to select the CSID format.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

debug dot11 aaa

Begin debugging of dot11 authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) operations

dot11 activity-timeout

Use the dot11 activity-timeout global configuration command to configure the number of seconds that the access point tracks an inactive device (the number depends on its device class). The access point applies the unknown device class to all non-Cisco Aironet devices.

dot11 activity-timeout { [ client-station | repeater | bridge | workgroup-bridge | unknown ] [ default <1 - 100000> ] [ maximum <1 - 100000> ] }

 
Syntax Description

client-station, repeater, bridge, workgroup- bridge

Specify Cisco Aironet device classes

unknown

Specifies unknown (non-Cisco Aironet) device class

default <1 - 100000>

Specifies the activity timeout value that the access point uses when a device associates and proposes a zero-refresh rate or does not propose a refresh rate

maximum <1 - 100000>

Specifies the maximum activity timeout allowed for a device regardless of the refresh rate proposed by a device when it associates

 
Defaults

Table 2-8 lists the default activity timeouts for each device class. All values are in seconds.

Table 2-8 Default Activity Timeouts

Device Class
Default Timeout

unknown

60

client-station

60

repeater

60

bridge

60

workgroup-bridge

60

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure default and maximum activity timeouts for all device classes:

AP(config)# dot11 activity-timeout default 5000 maximum 24000
 

 
Usage Guidelines

To set an activity timeout for all device types, set a default or maximum timeout without specifying a device class (for example, enter dot11 activity-timeout default 5000). The access point applies the timeout to all device types that are not already configured with a timeout.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout

Specifies the number of hours an inactive entry remains in the list of adjacent access points

show dot11 associations

Display the radio association table, radio association statistics, or association information about wireless devices

show dot11 network-map

Displays the radio network map

dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout

Use the dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout global configuration command to specify the number of hours an inactive entry remains in the list of adjacent access points.

dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout hours


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

hours

Specifies the number of hours an inactive entry remains in the list of adjacent access points

 
Defaults

The default age-timeout is 24 hours.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the timeout setting for inactive entries in the adjacent access point list:

AP# dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout 12
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 adjacent-ap

Displays the list of adjacent access points

dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout

Use the dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout global configuration command to specify the number of hours an inactive entry remains in the list of adjacent access points.

dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout hours


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

hours

Specifies the number of hours an inactive entry remains in the list of adjacent access points

 
Defaults

The default age-timeout is 24 hours.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the timeout setting for inactive entries in the adjacent access point list:

AP# dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout 12
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 adjacent-ap

Displays the list of adjacent access points

dot11 ant-band-mode

To enable single or dual band antenna on an access point use the dot11 ant-band-mode in global configuration mode.

dot11 ant-band-mode {dual | single}

 
Syntax Description

dual

Specifies dual band antenna mode

single

Specifies single band antenna mode

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable dual antenna on an access point.

ap(config)# dot11 ant-band-mode dual

This example shows how to enable single antenna on an access point.

ap(config)# dot11 ant-band-mode single
 

dot11 arp-cache

Use the dot11 arp-cache global configuration command to enable client ARP caching on the access point. ARP caching on the access point reduces the traffic on your wireless LAN and increases client battery life by stopping ARP requests for client devices at the access point. Instead of forwarding ARP requests to client devices, the access point responds to requests on behalf of associated client devices and drops ARP requests that are not directed to clients associated to the access point. When ARP caching is optional, the access point responds on behalf of clients with IP addresses known to the access point but forwards through its radio port any ARP requests addressed to unknown clients. When the access point knows all the IP addresses for associated clients, it drops any ARP requests not directed to its clients. In its beacon, the access point includes an information element to alert client devices that they can safely ignore broadcast messages to increase battery life.

[no] dot11 arp-cache [optional]

 
Syntax Description

optional

Configures the access point to respond to ARP requests addressed to clients for which the access point knows the IP address but forward through its radio port ARP requests addressed to client devices that the access point does not recognize. When the access point learns all the IP addresses for associated clients, it drops any ARP requests not directed to its clients.

 
Defaults

ARP caching is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable ARP caching:

AP(config)# dot11 arp-cache
 

dot11 association mac-list

To specify a MAC address access list used for dot11 association use the dot11 association mac-list command.

dot11 association mac-list number

 
Syntax Description

number

Specifies a number (700 to 799) for a 48-bit MAC address access list.

 
Defaults

No MAC address access list is assigned.

Examples

This example shows the creation of a MAC address access list used to filter one client with a MAC address of 0000.1234.5678.
 
AP(config)# access-list 700 deny 0000.1234.5678 0000.0000.0000
AP(config)# dot11 association mac-list 700

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show access-list

Displays the configured access-lists.

dot11 auto-immune

Use the dot11 auto-immune command to enable or disable protection from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. This feature protects against auto-immune attacks on the AP.

dot11 auto-immune {enable | disable}

 
Syntax Description

enable

Enables the auto-immune feature.

disable

Disables the auto-immune feature.

 
Defaults

This feature is disabled by default.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(25d)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

A potential attacker can use specially crafted packets to mislead the Intrusion Detection System (IDS) into treating a legitimate client as an attacker. It causes the controller to disconnect this legitimate client and launch a DoS attack. The auto-immune feature, when enabled, is designed to protect against such attacks. However, conversations using Cisco 792x phones might be interrupted intermittently when the auto-immune feature is enabled. If you experience frequent disruptions when using 792x phones, you might want to disable this feature.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the auto-immune mode.
 
AP(config)# dot11 auto-immune enable

dot11 band-select parameters

To assign parameters for Band Select feature, use the dot11 band-select parameters command in global configuration mode.

dot11 band-select parameters {cycle-count cycle-count | cycle-threshold milliseconds | expire-supression milliseconds | expire-dual-band milliseconds | client-rssi dBm }

 
Syntax Description

cycle-count

Assigns the maximum number of cycle-counts not responding. Valid range is from 1 to 10.

cycle-threshold

Assigns the cycle-threshold time in milliseconds to Band Select. Valid range is from 0 to 1000.

expire-supression

Assigns the threshold expiry time in milliseconds to Band Select. Valid range is from 10 to 200.

expire-dual-band

Assigns the dual band expiry time in milliseconds to Band Select. Valid range is from 10 to 300.

client-rssi

Assigns the minimum RSSI value in dBm required for the client to be elligible for Band Select. Valid range is from 20 to 90.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to assign cycle-count parameters for Band-Select:

ap(config)# dot11 band-select parameters
ap(config-bs-profile)# cycle-count 9
 

This example shows how to assign cycle-threshold parameters for Band-Select:

ap(config)# dot11 band-select parameters
ap(config-bs-profile)#cycle-threshold 500
 

This example shows how to assign expire-supression parameters for Band-Select:

ap(config)# dot11 band-select parameters
ap(config-bs-profile)# expire-supression 125
 

This example shows how to assign expire-dual-band parameters for Band-Select:

ap(config)# dot11 band-select parameters
ap(config-bs-profile)# expire-dual-band 135
 

This example shows how to assign client-rssi parameters for Band-Select:

ap(config)# dot11 band-select parameters
ap(config-bs-profile)# client-rssi 25

dot11 carrier busy

Use the dot11 carrier busy privileged exec command to display levels of radio activity on each channel.

dot11 interface-number carrier busy

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number (The 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0, and the 5-GHz radio is radio 1.)

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

During the carrier busy test, the access point or bridge drops all associations with wireless networking devices for about 4 seconds while it conducts the carrier test and then displays the test results.

You can re-display the carrier busy results using the

carrier busy command.

Examples

This example shows how to run the carrier busy test for radio interface 0:

AP# dot11 d0 carrier busy
 

This example shows the carrier busy test results:

Frequency Carrier Busy %
--------- --------------
5180 0
5200 2
5220 27
5240 5
5260 1
5280 0
5300 3
5320 2
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 carrier busy

Displays the carrier busy test results

dot11 dhcp broadcast allowed

When the wired clients behind a third party WGB device fail to get an IP address, use the dot11 dhcp broadcast allowed command, in the global configuration mode. By enabling this command, the DHCP packets that AP receives will not be unicast to its clients.

dot11 dhcp broadcast allowed

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Disabled by default. This means that the DHCP packets are unicast to its clients.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(3)JAB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable new commands on an access point:

AP# dot11 dhcp broadcast allowed
 
 

 

dot11 dot11r pre-authentication

To enable or disable over air or over-ds transition, use the dot11 dot11r pre-authentication command in configuration mode.

[no] dot11 dot11r pre-authentication [ over-air |over-ds ]

 
Syntax Description

over-air

Specifies the transition over air.

over-ds

Specifies the transition over-ds.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

dot11 dot11r re-association timer

To configure the re-association timer, use the dot11 dot11r re-association timer command in configuration mode.

dot11 dot11r re-association timer value

 
Syntax Description

value

Specifies the re-association time in milliseconds.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

dot11 extension aironet

Use the dot11 extension aironet configuration interface command to enable or disable Cisco Aironet extensions to the IEEE 802.11b standard. Use the no form of this command to disable the Cisco Aironet extensions.

[no] dot11 extension aironet


Note You cannot disable Cisco Aironet extensions on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Cisco Aironet extensions are enabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The Cisco Aironet extensions help clients choose the best access point. You must enable these extensions to use advanced features such as Cisco MIC and key hashing. Disable these extensions for non-Cisco clients that misinterpret the extensions.

Examples

This example shows how to enable Cisco Aironet extensions for the radio interface:

AP(config-if)# dot11 extension aironet
 

This example shows how to disable Cisco Aironet extensions for the radio interface:

AP(config-if)# no dot11 extension aironet

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

dot11 extension power native

Use the dot11 extension power native configuration interface command to configure the native MIB power table to be used to respond to SNMP queries on the access point power levels. This command works with the cd11IfPhyNativePowerUseStandard MIB object of the Cisco DOT11-IF-MIB. Use the no form of this command to use the standard MIB power table.

[no] dot11 extension power native

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The standard MIB power table is enabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the native MIB power table for the radio interface:

AP(config-if)# dot11 extension power native
 

This example shows how to return to the standard MIB power table for the radio interface:

AP(config-if)# no dot11 extension power native

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

dot11 guest username

To configure web authorization for a guest user, use the dot11 guest username command in global configuration mode.

dot11 guest username name lifetime mins password value

 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies guest username.

mins

Specifies timeout time for the guest user. The value ranges from 5 minutes to 35791minutes.

value

Specifies the access password for the guest username.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Guest configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure web authorization for a guest user:

ap(config)# dot11 guest
ap(config-guest-mode)# username abcd lifetime 25 password xyz

dot11 holdoff-time

Use the dot11 holdoff-time global configuration command to specify the hold-off time for EAP and MAC address authentication. The holdoff time is invoked when a client fails three login attempts or fails to respond to three authentication requests from the access point. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to defaults.

[no] dot11 holdoff-time seconds

 
Syntax Description

seconds

Specifies the hold-off time (1 to 65555 seconds)

 
Defaults

The default holdoff time is 0 (disabled).

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify a 2-minute hold-off time:

AP(config)# dot11 holdoff-time 120
 

This example shows how reset the hold-off time to defaults:

AP(config)# dot11 no holdoff-time

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays information on the current running access point configuration

dot11 ids eap attempts

Use the dot11 ids eap attempts global configuration command to configure the number of authentication attempts and the number of seconds of EAPOL flooding that trigger a fault on a scanner access point in monitor mode.

Setting an authentication failure limit protects your network against a denial-of-service attack called EAPOL flooding. The 802.1X authentication that takes place between a client and the access point triggers a series of messages between the access point, the authenticator, and an authentication server using EAPOL messaging. The authentication server can quickly become overwhelmed if there are too many authentication attempts. If not regulated, a single client can trigger enough authentication requests to impact your network.

A scanner access point in monitor mode tracks the rate at which 802.1X clients attempt to authenticate through the access point. If your network is attacked through excessive authentication attempts, the access point generates an alert when the authentication threshold has been exceeded.

[no] dot11 ids eap attempts number period seconds

 
Syntax Description

number

Specifies the number of authentication attempts that triggers a fault on a scanner access point in monitor mode

seconds

Specifies the number of seconds of EAPOL flooding that triggers a fault on a scanner access point in monitor mode

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a limit on authentication attempts and on the duration of EAPOL flooding on a scanner access point in monitor mode:

ap(config)# dot11 ids eap attempts 10 period 10
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

debug dot11 ids

Enables wireless IDS debugging

show dot11 ids eap

Displays IDS statistics

dot11 ids mfp

Use the dot11 ids mfp global configuration command to configure Management Frame Protection (MFP) parameters on the access point.


Note To configure an MFP distributor, the access point must be configured as a WDS.


[no] dot11 ids mfp {detector | distributor | generator}

detector

Enables the MFP detector on the access point.

distributor

Configures the MFP distributor on the access point.

generator

Configures an MFP generator.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the MFP detector, enable the MFP gesticulator, and configure the MFP generator on the access point:

ap(config)# dot11 ids mfp detector
ap(config)# dot11 ids mfp distributor
ap(config)# dot11 ids mfp generator
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 ids mfp

Displays MFP parameters configured on the access point.

debug dot11 ids mfp

Debugs MFP operations on the access point.

dot11 igmp snooping-helper

Use the dot11 igmp snooping-helper global configuration command to begin sending IGMP Query requests when a new client associates with the access point. Use the no form of this command to disable the IGMP Query requests.

[no] dot11 igmp snooping-helper

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

IGMP Query requests are disabled.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable IGMP Query requests:

AP(config)# dot11 igmp snooping-helper
 

This example shows how to stop or disable the IGMP Query requests:

AP(config)# no dot11 igmp snooping-helper

dot11 lbs

Use the dot11 lbs global configuration command to create a location based services (LBS) profile and to enter LBS configuration mode.

[no] dot11 lbs profile-name

 
Syntax Description

profile-name

Specifies the name of the LBS profile

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to create an LBS profile and enter LBS configuration mode:

ap(config)# dot11 lbs southside
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

channel-match (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies that the LBS packet sent by an LBS tag must match the radio channel on which the access point receives the packet

interface dot11 (LBS configuration mode)

Enables an LBS profile on a radio interface

method (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the location method used in an LBS profile

multicast address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the multicast address that LBS tag devices use when they send LBS packets

packet-type (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the LBS packet type accepted in an LBS profile

server-address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the IP address of the location server on your network

dot11 linktest

Use the dot11 linktest privileged EXEC command to test a radio link between the access point and a client device.

dot11 interface-number linktest
[target mac-address]
[count packet-number]
[interval sec]
[packet-size size]
[rate value]

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number (The 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0, and the 5-GHz radio is radio 1.)

target mac-address

(Optional) Specifies the MAC address (in xxxx.xxxx.xxxx format) of the client device

count packet-number

(Optional) Specifies the number of packets (1 to 9999) to send to the client device

interval sec

(Optional) Specifies the time interval between tests (from 1 to 10000 seconds)

packet-size size

(Optional) Specifies the size of each packet (from 1 to 1400 bytes)

rate value

(Optional) Specifies a specific link test data rate.

  • Rates for the 802.11b, 2.4-GHz radio are 1, 2, 5, or 11 Mbps.
  • Rates for the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radio are 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps.
  • Rates for the 5-GHz radio are 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps.

 
Defaults

The default target for a root access point is the first client. The default target for a repeater is its parent access point.

The default count specifies that test runs once.

The default interval is 5 seconds.

The default packet-size is 512 bytes.

The default rate is the automatic rate-shifting algorithm.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(8)JA

Parameters were added to support the 5-GHz access point radio.

12.2(11)JA

Parameters were added to support the 5.8-GHz bridge radio.

12.2(13)JA

Parameters were added to support the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz access point radio.

 
Usage Guidelines

The link test verifies the radio link between the access point and a client device by sending the client a series of special packets, which the client returns to the access point.


Note Some client devices, such as non-Cisco wireless clients, wired clients that are connected to a workgroup bridge, or non-Cisco clients connected to a repeater access point, might not respond to link test packets.


The client adds information to the packets that quantify how well it received the request. Results are displayed as a table of packet statistics, quality, and signal-level information.

If you specify an interval, the test repeats continuously separated by the specified number of seconds. To abort the test, type the escape sequence (Ctrl key and ^ key). Without an interval, the test runs once.

Examples

This example shows how to initiate a radio link test to send 10 packets to client MAC address 0040963181CF on radio interface 0:

AP# dot11 dot11radio 0 linktest target 0040.9631.81CF count 10
 

This example shows how to initiate a radio link test to send 100 packets of 500 bytes to client MAC address 0040963181CF on radio interface 0:

AP# dot11 dot11radio 0 linktest target 0040.9631.81CF packet-size 500 count 100

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces dot11radio statistics

Displays the radio statistics

show dot11 associations

Displays the radio association table

show dot11 network-map

Displays the radio network map

dot11 location isocc

Use the dot11 location isocc global configuration command to configure location identifiers that the access point sends with all RADIUS authentication and accounting requests.

dot11 location isocc ISO-country-code cc country-code ac area-code

 
Syntax Description

isocc ISO-country-code

Specifies the ISO country code that the access point includes in RADIUS authentication and accounting requests

cc country-code

Specifies the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) country code that the access point includes in RADIUS authentication and accounting requests

ac area-code

Specifies the ITU area code that the access point includes in RADIUS authentication and accounting requests

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can find a list of ISO and ITU country and area codes at the ISO and ITU websites. Cisco IOS software does not check the validity of the country and area codes that you enter with this command.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the ISO and ITU location codes on the access point:

ap(config)# dot11 location isocc us cc 1 ac 408
 

This example shows how the access point adds the SSID used by the client device and how it formats the location-ID string:

isocc=us,cc=1,ac=408,network=ACMEWISP_NewarkAirport
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

snmp-server location

Specifies the SNMP system location and the WISPr location-name attribute

dot11 mbssid

Use the dot11 mbssid global configuration command to enable multiple basic SSIDs on all access point radio interfaces.

[no] dot11 mbssid


Note This command is supported only on access points that contain at least one radio interface that supports multiple basic SSIDs. To determine whether a radio supports multiple basic SSIDs, enter the show controllers radio_interface command. Multiple basic SSIDs are supported if the results include this line:
Number of supported simultaneous BSSID on radio_interface: 8


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable multiple basic SSIDs on all interfaces that support multiple basic SSIDs:

ap(config)# dot11 mbssid
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mbssid (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies that a BSSID is included in beacons and specifies a DTIM period for the BSSID

show dot11 bssid

Displays configured BSSIDs

dot11 meter

Use the dot11 meter privileged EXEC command to measure the performance of packet forwarding. To display the results, use the show dot11 statistics metered-traffic command.

dot11 interface-number meter

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number. The 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0. The 5-GHz radio is radio 1.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to activate the meter tool for radio interface 0:

AP# dot11 dot11radio 0 meter

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 statistics metered-traffic

Displays packet forwarding performance

dot11 network-map

Use the dot11 network-map global configuration command to enable the radio network map feature. When enabled, the access point broadcasts a IAPP GenInfo Request every collection interval. This request solicits information from all Cisco access points in the same Layer 2 domain. Upon receiving a GetInfo Request, the access point sends a unicast IAPP GenInfo Response back to the requester. The access point uses these IAPP GenInfo Responses to build a network-map.

dot11 network-map [ collect-interval ]

 
Syntax Description

collect-interval

Specifies the time interval between IAPP GenInfo Requests (1 to 60 seconds)

 
Defaults

The default collect interval is 5 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to generate a radio network map with a collection interval of 30 seconds:

ap(config)# dot11 network-map 30
 

You can verify the network map by using the show dot11 network-map EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 network-map

Displays the radio network map

dot11 pause-time

Use the dot11 pause-time global configuration command to set the retransmission timeout for 802.11 data frames, in milliseconds. The default, and also the maximum, value is 100 ms. The minimum is 10 ms.

dot11 pause-time timeout

 
Syntax Description

timeout

Specifies the retransmission timeout for 802.11 data frames, in milliseconds.

 
Defaults

The default, and also the maximum, timeout value is 100 ms.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(3)JD

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example sets the retransmission timeout for 802.11 data frames to 50 milliseconds:

AP(config)# dot11 pause-time 50
 

 

dot11 phone

Use the dot11 phone global configuration command to enable or disable IEEE 802.11 compliance phone support. Use the no form of this command to disable the IEEE 802.11 phone.

[no] dot11 phone dot11e


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

dot11e

Specifies the use of the standard QBSS Load Information Element (IE).

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.3(7)JA

Parameter added for the standard (IEEE 802.11e draft 13) QBSS Load IE.

 
Usage Guidelines

Enabling IEEE 802.11 compliance phone support adds information to the access point beacons and probe responses. This information helps some 802.11 phones make intelligent choices about the access point to which they should associate. Some phones do not associate with an access point without this additional information.

The dot11e parameter enables the future upgrade of the 7920 Wireless Phone firmware to support the standard QBSS Load IE. The new 7920 Wireless Phone firmware will be announced at a later date.


Note This release continues to support your existing 7920 Wireless Phone firmware. Please do not attempt to use the standard (IEEE 802.11e draft 13) QBSS Load IE with the 7920 Wireless Phone until new phone firmware is available for you to upgrade your phones.


Examples

This example shows how to enable IEEE 802.11 phone support with the legacy QBSS Load element:

AP(config)# dot11 phone
 

This example shows how to enable IEEE 802.11 phone support with the standard (IEEE 802.11e
draft 13) QBSS Load element:

AP(config)# no dot11 phone dot11e

This example shows how to stop or disable the IEEE 802.11 phone support:

AP(config)# no dot11 phone

dot11 priority-map avvid

Use the dot11 priority-map avvid global configuration command to enable or disable Cisco AVVID (Architecture for Voice, Video and Integrated Data) priority mapping. AVVID priority mapping maps Ethernet packets tagged as class of service 5 to class of service 6. This feature enables the access point to apply the correct priority to voice packets for compatibility with Cisco AVVID networks. Use the no form of this command to disable AVVID priority mapping.

[no] dot11 priority-map avvid


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

AVVID priority mapping is enabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to stop or disable AVVID priority mapping:

AP(config)# no dot11 priority-map avvid

This example shows how to enable AVVID priority mapping:

AP(config)# dot11 priority-map avvid
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify

show class-map

Displays quality of service (QoS) class maps

dot11 qos class

Use the dot11qos class interface configuration mode command to configure QOS class parameters for the radio interface. Use the no form of the command to disable the QOS parameters.

[no] dot11 qos class {background | best-effort | video | voice}
{ [both] [cell] [local] }


Note This command is not supported when operating in repeater mode.


 
Syntax Description

background

Specifies the QOS traffic is a background process.

best-effort

Specifies the QOS traffic is a best-effort process.

video

Specifies the QOS traffic is video data.

voice

Specifies the QOS traffic is voice data.

both

Specifies the QOS parameters for local and radio use.

cell

Specifies the QOS parameters apply to the radio cells.

local

Specifies the QOS parameters are for local use only.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify video traffic support on radio cells:

AP(config)# interface dot11radio 1
AP(config-if)# dot11 qos class video cell
AP(config-if-qosclass)#
 

This example shows how to disable video traffic support on radio cells:

AP(config-if)# no dot11 qos class video
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Configures CAC admission control on the access point.

show dot11 cac

Displays admission control information on the access point.

traffic-stream

Configures CAC traffic data rates and priorities on the access point.

debug cac

Provides debug information for CAC admission control on the access point.

dot11 ssid

Use the dot11 ssid global configuration command to create a global SSID. The SSID is inactive until you use the ssid configuration interface command to assign the SSID to a specific radio interface.

dot11 ssid ssid

In Cisco IOS Release 12.3(4)JA, you can configure SSIDs globally or for a specific radio interface. However, when you create an SSID using the ssid configuration interface command, the access point stores the SSID in global configuration mode.

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to:

  • Create an SSID in global configuration mode
  • Configure the SSID for RADIUS accounting
  • Set the maximum number of client devices that can associate using this SSID to 15
  • Assign the SSID to a VLAN
  • Assign the SSID to a radio interface
AP# configure terminal
AP(config)# dot11 ssid batman
AP(config-ssid)# accounting accounting-method-list
AP(config-ssid)# max-associations 15
AP(config-ssid)# vlan 3762
AP(config-ssid)# exit
AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# ssid batman
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config ssid

Displays configuration details for SSIDs created in global configuration mode

ssid

Creates an SSID in configuration interface mode or assigns a globally configured SSID to a specific radio interface

dot11 ssid band-select

To enable Band Select under an SSID, use the dot11 ssid band-select command in global configuration mode.

dot11 ssid ssid band-select

 
Syntax Description

ssid

Specifies a name to assign to a SSID. The name can contain up to 32 ASCII characters.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable Band Select on a SSID:

AP# configure terminal
AP(config)# dot11 ssid batman
AP(config-ssid)# band-select

dot11 syslog

The ASSOC/DISASSOC messages can be enabled to appear on the console using the dot11 syslog command. To disable these messages, use the no dot11 syslog command.

[no] dot11 syslog

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

By default the dot11 syslog command is enabled and the ASSOC/DISASSOC messages appear on the console.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration mode.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JED

This command was introduced.

Examples

To enable the ASSOC/DISASSOC messages to appear on the console:

AP(config)# dot11 syslog

 

To disable the ASSOC/DISASSOC messages from appearing on the console:

AP(config)# no dot11 syslog
 

dot11 update-group-key

Use the dot11 update-group-key privileged EXEC command to trigger an update of the WPA group key. When you enter the command, the access point distributes a new WPA group key to authenticated client devices.

dot11 interface-number update-group-key [vlan vlan-id]

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number (the 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0; the 5-GHz radio is radio 1)

vlan-id

Specifies the VLAN on which the access point sends out the group key update

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to trigger a group key update on VLAN 2:

AP# dot11 d0 update-group-key vlan 2
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

authentication key-management

Configures the radio interface (for a specified SSID) to support authenticated key management

dot11 vlan-name

Use the dot11 vlan-name global configuration command to assign a name to a VLAN in addition to its numerical ID.

dot11 vlan-name name vlan vlan-id

 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies a name to assign to a VLAN ID. The name can contain up to 32 ASCII characters.

vlan-id

Specifies the VLAN ID to which the name is assigned.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Keep these guidelines in mind when using VLAN names:

  • The mapping of a VLAN name to a VLAN ID is local to each access point, so across your network, you can assign the same VLAN name to a different VLAN ID.

Note If clients on your wireless LAN require seamless roaming, Cisco recommends that you assign the same VLAN name to the same VLAN ID across all access points, or that you use only VLAN IDs without names.


  • Every VLAN configured on your access point must have an ID, but VLAN names are optional.
  • VLAN names can contain up to 32 ASCII characters. However, a VLAN name cannot be a number between 1 and 4095. For example, vlan4095 is a valid VLAN name, but 4095 is not. The access point reserves the numbers 1 through 4095 for VLAN IDs.

Examples

This example shows how to assign a name to a VLAN:

AP(config)# dot11 vlan-name chicago vlan 121
 

You can view VLAN name and ID pairs by using the show dot11 vlan-name EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 traffic-streams

Displays VLAN name and ID pairs.

dot11 wpa handshake init-delay

Use the dot11 wpa handshake init-delay configuration command to introduce a delay to start the four-way handshake in WPA PSK or dot1x. This command is applicable to an AP working in root or bridge mode.

dot11 wpa handshake init-delay time

 
Syntax Description

time

Specifies the delay value. Valid range is from 0 ms to 10 ms.

 
Defaults

The default timeout is 0 ms.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(25d)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to assign a delay to start the four-way handshake in WPA PSK or dot1x:

# dot11 wpa handshake init-delay 10
 

dot11 wpa handshake timeout

Use the dot11 wpa handshake timeout configuration command to adjust the duration before timing out WPA key packet transmission. This timer value may need to be increased with WPA clients in PSP mode.

dot11 wpa handshake timeout time

 
Syntax Description

time

Specifies the new timeout time. Valid range is from 100ms to 2000ms.

 
Defaults

The default timeout is 100ms.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Usage Guidelines

The WPA handshake timeout timer starts when the access point's state machine submits the key packet for transmission. If the client is in power save mode (PSP) at this time, the timer may expire before the client can come out of PSP mode and the packet can actually be transmitted. For PSP clients, a timeout value of 1000ms may work more reliably.

dot1x credentials

Use the dot1x credentials global configuration command to configure a dot1x credentials profile. The no form of the command disables the profile.

[no] dot1x credentials profile-name


Note This command is not supported on c1200 and c1100 platforms.


 
Syntax Description

profile-name

Specifies the name of the dot1x credentials profile.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the dot1x credentials command to configure a dot1x credentials profile. Issuing
dot1x credentials profile-name puts you in dot1x credentials configuration mode where you can specify profile parameters using these subcommands:

 

Command
Description

anonymous-id <name>

Specifies an anonymous user identification name.

description <line>

Provides a description for the dot1x credentials profile.

exit

Exits dot1x credentials configuration mode.

no

Negates a command or sets its defaults.

password [0] [7] <password>

Specifies the authentication password.

  • 0—Specifies an unencrypted password follows.
  • 7—Specifies a hidden password follows.
  • password—The password.

pki-trustpoint <name>

Specifies the default pki trustpoint name.

username <name>

Specifies the authentication username.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a dot1x credentials profile and specify the profile description, authentication password, and username:

AP(config)# dot1x credentials test
AP(config-dot1x-creden)# description This is a test credential profile
AP(config-dot1x-creden)# password 7 R127A61290H23
AP(config-dot1x-creden)# username John110
AP(config-dot1x-creden)# exit
 

dot1x eap profile (configuration interface mode)

Use the dot1x eap profile interface configuration mode command to enable a preconfigured EAP profile for the fast Ethernet interface. Use the no form of this command to disable the EAP profile.

[no] dot1x eap profile profile-name

 
Syntax Description

profile-name

Specifies the name of the EAP profile.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You must first configure an EAP profile before you can enable the profile on the fast Ethernet interface. To configure an EAP profile, use the eap profile configuration command. To enable a preconfigured EAP profile on the fast Ethernet interface, use the dot1x eap profile configuration interface command.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the preconfigured EAP test profile on the fast Ethernet interface:

AP(config)# interface fastethernet 0
AP(config-if)# dot1x eap profile test
 

This example shows how to disable the EAP test profile on the fast Ethernet interface:

AP(config)# interface fastethernet 0
AP(config-if)# no dot1x eap profile test

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

eap profile

Configures an EAP profile.

method (eap profile configuration mode)

Specifies the method types for an EAP profile.

show eap registrations

Displays EAP registrations for the access point.

show eap sessions

Displays EAP statistics for the access point.

dot1x eap profile (SSID configuration mode)

Use the dot1x eap profile SSID configuration mode command to enable a preconfigured EAP profile for the SSID. Use the no form of this command to disable the EAP profile.

[no] dot1x eap profile profile-name

 
Syntax Description

profile-name

Specifies the name of the EAP profile.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You must configure an EAP profile before you can enable the profile for the SSID interface. To configure an EAP profile, use the eap profile configuration command. To enable a preconfigured EAP profile for the SSID interface, use the dot1x eap profile configuration interface command.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the preconfigured EAP profile test on the SSID configuration interface:

AP(config)# dot11 ssid EAP_test
AP(config-ssid)# dot1x eap profile test
 

This example shows how to disable the EAP test profile on the SSID interface:

AP(config)# dot11 ssid EAP_test
AP(config-ssid)# no dot1x eap profile test

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

eap profile

Configures an EAP profile.

method (eap profile configuration mode)

Specifies the method types for an EAP profile.

show eap registrations

Displays EAP registrations for the access point.

show eap sessions

Displays EAP statistics for the access point.

dot1x timeout reauth-period

Use the dot1x timeout reauth-period configuration interface command to configure the dot1x client reauthentication period. The no form of the command disables reauthentication.

[no] dot1x timeout reauth-period {<sec> | server}

 
Syntax Description

sec

Specifies the number of seconds (1 to 65555 seconds).

server

Specifies reauthentication period is configured on the authentication server. If you use this option, configure your authentication server with RADIUS attribute 27, Session-Timeout. This attribute sets the maximum number of seconds of serveice to be provided to a client device before termination of the session. The server sends this attribute to the access point when a client performs EAP authentication.

 
Defaults

The default is Disabled.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JEA

This command was introduced.

12.4(21a)JA1

This command was modified.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a dot1x client reauthentication period to a value of 100 seconds:

AP(config)# dot1x timeout reauth-period 100
 

dot1x timeout supp-response

Use the dot1x timeout supp-response global configuration command to configure the time that an access point waits for the wireless client to reply to an EAP dot1x message. The no form of the command disables the timeout.

[no] dot1x timeout supp-response time [local]

 
Syntax Description

time

Specifies the timeout value (1 to 120 seconds).

local

Specifies that the access point must use the local configured timeout value and ignore the override timeout value from the RADIUS server.

 
Defaults

The default is 30 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure an access point to control the EAP dot1x wireless client response timeout and configure a value of 100 seconds:

AP(config)# dot1x timeout supp-response 100 local
 

duplex

To configure the duplex operation on a wireless device’s Ethernet port, use the duplex interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return the system to auto-duplex mode.

[no] duplex {auto | full | half}


Note Cisco recommends that you use auto, the default setting, for both duplex and speed settings on the Ethernet port.


 
Syntax Description

auto

Specifies auto-duplex operation. Cisco recommends that you use this setting.

full

Specifies full-duplex operation.

half

Specifies auto-duplex operation.

 
Defaults

The default duplex setting is auto.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Cisco recommends that you use auto, the default setting, for both the speed and duplex settings on the Ethernet port.

When the access point or bridge receives inline power from a switch, any change in the speed or duplex settings that resets the Ethernet link reboots the unit. If the switch port to which the wireless device is connected is not set to auto, you can change the wireless device port to half or full to correct a duplex mismatch and the Ethernet link is not reset. However, if you change from half or full back to auto, the link is reset and, if the wireless device receives inline power from a switch, the wireless device reboots.


Note The speed and duplex settings on the wireless device Ethernet port must match the Ethernet settings on the port to which the wireless device is connected. If you change the settings on the port to which the wireless device is connected, change the settings on the wireless device Ethernet port to match.


Examples

This example shows how to configure the Ethernet port for auto duplex:

AP(config-if)# duplex auto
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

speed (Ethernet interface)

Configures the speed setting on the Ethernet port

eap profile

Use the eap profile global configuration command to configure an EAP profile. Use the no form of this command to disable the EAP profile.

[no] eap profile profile-name


Note This command is not supported on c1200 and c1100 platforms.


 
Syntax Description

profile-name

Specifies the name of the EAP profile.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the eap profile command to configure an eap profile. Issuing the eap profile command puts you in dot1x eap profile mode.

You can specify eap profile parameters using these subcommands:

  • description—Specifies a text description for the EAP profile.
  • method—Specifies EAP method types for the EAP profile.

Examples

This example shows how to create and provide a description for the EAP profile test:

AP(config)#eap profile test
AP(config-eap-profile)#description This is a test EAP profile
 

This example shows how to disable the EAP test profile:

AP(config-if)# no eap profile test

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

method (eap profile configuration mode)

Configures EAP types for the EAP profile.

show eap regisgtrations

Displays EAP registrations for the access point.

show eap sessions

Displays EAP statistics for the access point.

dot1x eap profile

Configures a dot1x EAP profile for an interface.

eapfast authority

Use the eapfast authority command to configure an EAP-FAST authority ID (AID) for a local authenticator access point. The EAP-FAST AID identifies the server that authenticates the EAP-FAST client. The local authenticator sends its AID to an authenticating client, and the client checks its database for a matching AID. If the client does not recognize the AID, it requests a new Protected Access Credential (PAC).

[no] eapfast authority {id identifier | info string}

 
Syntax Description

id identifier

Specifies an authority identifier for the local authenticator access point. Enter up to 32 hexadecimal digits for the AID.

info string

Specifies an AID information string. The information string is not used during EAP-FAST authentication, but it provides additional information about the local authenticator. Enter up to 32 ASCII characters.

 
Defaults

The default AID is LOCAL RADIUS SER.

 
Command Modes

Configuration mode for local authenticators

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure an AID for the local authenticator access point:

AP(config-radsrv)#eapfast authority id ap1200
 

This example shows how to configure an information string for the AID:

AP(config-radsrv)#eapfast authority id AP1200 A+G North
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

radius local-server pac-generate

Generates a PAC file for an EAP-FAST client

eapfast pac expiry

Use the eapfast pac expiry global configuration command to set the Protected Access Credential (PAC) expiration time and grace period for a group of EAP-FAST clients associated to a local authenticator access point.

[no] eapfast pac expiry days [grace days]

 
Syntax Description

days

Specifies the number of days that the PAC is valid for a group of EAP-FAST clients. Enter a number of days from 1 to 4095.

grace days

Specifies the grace period after the PAC expires. The PAC remains valid until the end of the grace period. Enter a number of days from 1 to 4095.

 
Defaults

The default is infinite days for both the expiration time and the grace period.

 
Command Modes

Client group configuration mode for local authenticators

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

In this example, PACs for the user group clerks expire in 10 days with a grace period of two days:

AP(config)#radius-server local
AP(config-radsrv)#group clerks
AP(config-radsrv-group)#eapfast pac expiry 10 grace 2
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

radius local-server pac-generate

Generates a PAC file for an EAP-FAST client

eapfast server-key

Use the eapfast server-key command to configure EAP-FAST server keys. The local authenticator uses server keys to encrypt Protected Access Credential (PAC) files that it generates and to decrypt PACs when it is authenticating clients. The server maintains two keys, a primary key and a secondary key, and uses the primary key to encrypt PACs. Periodically, the local authenticator switches keys, making the primary key the secondary and using the secondary key as the primary. If you do not configure server keys, the local authenticator generates keys automatically.

When the local authenticator receives a client PAC, it attempts to decrypt the PAC with the primary key. If decryption fails with the primary key, the authenticator attempts to decrypt the PAC with the secondary key. If decryption fails with the secondary key, the authenticator rejects the PAC as invalid.

[no] eapfast server-key { primary {auto-generate | [0 | 7] key} |
secondary [0 | 7] key}

 
Syntax Description

primary {auto-generate |
[0 | 7] key

Specifies a primary EAP-FAST server key. Use the auto-generate option to configure the local authenticator to generate a primary server key automatically. To configure a specific key, enter the key preceded by 0 or 7. Keys can contain up to 32 hexadecimal digits. Enter 0 before the key to enter an unencrypted key. Enter 7 before the key to enter an encrypted key.

secondary [0 | 7] key

Specifies a secondary EAP-FAST server key. Enter the key preceded by 0 or 7. Keys can contain up to 32 hexadecimal digits. Enter 0 before the key to enter an unencrypted key. Enter 7 before the key to enter an encrypted key.

 
Defaults

By default, the local authenticator generates server keys automatically.

 
Command Modes

Configuration mode for local authenticators

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a primary server key for the local authenticator access point:

AP(config-radsrv)#eapfast server-key primary 0 2468
 

This example shows how to configure a secondary server key:

AP(config-radsrv)#eapfast server-key secondary 0 9753

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

radius local-server pac-generate

Generates a PAC file for an EAP-FAST client

encryption key

Use the encryption key configuration interface command to define a WEP key used for data encryption on the wireless LAN or on a specific virtual LAN (VLAN). Use the no form of the command to remove a specific encryption key.


Note You need to configure static WEP keys only if your access point supports client devices that use static WEP. If all the client devices that associate to the access point use key management (WPA, CCKM, or 802.1x authentication) you do not need to configure static WEP keys.



Note Encryption VLAN is not supported on bridges.


[no] encryption
[vlan vlan-id ]
key 1-4
size {40bit | 128Bit}
encryption-key
[transmit-key]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

Specifies the VLAN number (1 to 4095)

key 1-4

Specifies the number of the key (1 to 4) that is being configured. (A total of four encryption keys can be configured for each VLAN.)

Note If you configure static WEP with MIC or CMIC, the access point and associated client devices must use the same WEP key as the transmit key, and the key must be in the same key slot on the access point and the clients. See Table 2-9 for a list of WEP key restrictions based on your security configuration.

size 40bit

Specifies a 40-bit encryption key

size 128bit

Specifies a 128-bit encryption key

encryption-key

Specifies the value of the encryption key:

  • A 40-bit encryption key requires 10 (hexadecimal) digits.
  • A 128-bit encryption key requires 26 (hexadecimal) digits.

transmit-key

Specifies the key for encrypting transmit data from the access point. Key slot 1 is the default key slot.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Using security features such as authenticated key management can limit WEP key configurations. Table 2-9 lists WEP key restrictions based on your security configuration.

 

Table 2-9 WEP Key Restrictions

Security Configuration
WEP Key Restriction

CCKM or WPA authenticated key management

Cannot configure a WEP key in key slot 1

LEAP or EAP authentication

Cannot configure a WEP key in key slot 4

Cipher suite with 40-bit WEP

Cannot configure a 128-bit key

Cipher suite with 128-bit WEP

Cannot configure a 40-bit key

Cipher suite with TKIP

Cannot configure any WEP keys

Cipher suite with TKIP and 40-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP

Cannot configure a WEP key in key slot 1 and 4

Static WEP with MIC or CMIC

Access point and client devices must use the same WEP key as the transmit key, and the key must be in the same key slot on both access point and clients

Broadcast key rotation

Keys in slots 2 and 3 are overwritten by rotating broadcast keys

Examples

This example shows how to configure a 40-bit encryption key with a value of 11aa33bb55 as
WEP key 1 used on VLAN number 1:

AP(config-if)# encryption vlan 1 key 1 size 40bit 11aa33bb55 transmit-key
 

This example shows how to remove WEP key 1 on VLAN 1:

AP(config-if)# no encryption vlan 1 key 1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

encryption mode ciphers

Use the encryption mode ciphers configuration interface command to enable a cipher suite. Cipher suites are sets of encryption algorithms that, like WEP, protect radio communication on your wireless LAN. You must use a cipher suite to enable Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) or Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM).

Because cipher suites provide the protection of WEP while also allowing use of authenticated key management, Cisco recommends that you enable WEP by using the encryption mode ciphers command in the CLI or by using the cipher drop-down menu in the web-browser interface. Cipher suites that contain TKIP provide the best security for your wireless LAN, and cipher suites that contain only WEP are the least secure.


Note You can also use the encryption mode wep command to set up static WEP. However, you should use encryption mode wep only if all clients that associate to the access point are not capable of key management.



Note Encryption VLAN is not supported on bridges.


encryption [vlan vlan] mode ciphers
{[aes-ccm | ckip | cmic | ckip-cmic | tkip]}
{[wep128 | wep40]}

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN number

aes-ccm

Specifies that AES-CCMP is included in the cipher suite.

ckip1

Specifies that ckip is included in the cipher suite.

cmic 1

Specifies that cmic is included in the cipher suite.

ckip-cmic 1

Specifies that both ckip and cmic are included in the cipher suite.

tkip

Specifies that TKIP is included in the cipher suite.

Note If you enable a cipher suite with two elements (such as TKIP and 128-bit WEP), the second cipher becomes the group cipher.

wep128

Specifies that 128-bit WEP is included in the cipher suite.

wep40

Specifies that 40-bit WEP is included in the cipher suite.

1.You must enable Aironet extensions to use this option in the cipher suite.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(15)JA

This command was modified to include support for AES-CCMP.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you configure your access point to use WPA or CCKM authenticated key management, you must select a cipher suite compatible with the authenticated key management type. Table 2-10 lists the cipher suites that are compatible with WPA and CCKM.
 

Table 2-10 Cipher Suites Compatible with WPA and CCKM

Authenticated Key Management Types
Compatible Cipher Suites

CCKM

  • encryption mode ciphers wep128
  • encryption mode ciphers wep40
  • encryption mode ciphers ckip
  • encryption mode ciphers cmic
  • encryption mode ciphers ckip-cmic
  • encryption mode ciphers tkip
  • encryption mode ciphers tkip wep128
  • encryption mode ciphers tkip wep40

WPA

  • encryption mode ciphers tkip
  • encryption mode ciphers tkip wep128
  • encryption mode ciphers tkip wep40

Note You must enable Aironet extensions to include CKIP, CMIC, or CKIP-CMIC in a cipher suite. Use the dot11 extension aironet command to enable Aironet extensions.


Refer to the Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide for Cisco Aironet Access Points for a complete description of WPA and CCKM and instructions for configuring authenticated key management.

Examples

This example sets up a cipher suite for VLAN 22 that enables CKIP, CMIC, and 128-bit WEP.

ap(config-if)# encryption vlan 22 mode ciphers ckip-cmic wep128
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

encryption mode wep

Configures the access point for WEP encryption

authentication open (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the client authentication type for an SSID, including WPA and CCKM authenticated key management

encryption mode wep

Use the encryption mode wep configuration interface command to enable a specific encryption type that is used to communicate on the wireless LAN or on a specific VLAN. When encryption is enabled, all client devices on the wireless LAN or on a VLAN must support the specified encryption methods to communicate with the access point. Use the no form of the command to disable the encryption features on a specific VLAN.


Note Because cipher suites provide the protection of WEP while also allowing use of authenticated key management, Cisco recommends that you enable WEP by using the encryption mode ciphers command. Cipher suites that contain TKIP provide the best security for your wireless LAN, and cipher suites that contain only WEP are the least secure.



Note Encryption VLAN is not supported on bridges.


[no] encryption [vlan vlan-id ] mode wep
{ mandatory | optional}
{key-hash | mic [key-hash] }

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN number

mandatory

Specifies that encryption is mandatory for the client to communicate with the access point

optional

Specifies that client devices can communicate with the access point with or without using encryption

key-hash

(Optional) Specifies that encryption key hashing is required for client devices to communicate with the access point

mic

(Optional) Specifies that encryption with message integrity check (MIC) is required for client devices to communicate with the access point

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify that encryption key hashing must be used on VLAN number 1:

AP(config-if)# encryption vlan 1 mode wep mandatory key-hash
 

This example shows how to disable mandatory encryption on VLAN 1:

AP(config-if)# no encryption vlan 1 mode wep mandatory

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

exception crashinfo buffersize

To change the size of the buffer used for crashinfo files, use the exception crashinfo buffersize command in global configuration mode. To revert to the default buffersize, use the no form of this command.

exception crashinfo buffersize kilobytes

no exception crashinfo buffersize kilobytes

 
Syntax Description

kilobytes

Sets the size of the buffersize to the specified value within the range of 32 to 100 kilobytes. The default is 32 KB.

 
Defaults

Crashinfo buffer is 32 KB.

 
Command Modes

Global config

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The crashinfo file saves information that helps Cisco technical support representatives to debug problems that caused the Cisco IOS image to fail (crash). The access point writes the crash information to the console at the time of the failure, and the file is created the next time you boot the Cisco IOS image after the failure (instead of while the system is failing).

Examples

This example sets the crashinfo buffer to 100 KB:

ap(config)# exception crashinfo buffersize 100
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

exception crashinfo file

Enables the creation of a diagnostic file at the time of unexpected system shutdowns.

exception crashinfo file

To enable the creation of a diagnostic file at the time of unexpected system shutdowns, use the exception crashinfo file command in global configuration mode. To disable the creation of crashinfo files, use the no form of this command.

exception crashinfo file device:filename

no exception crashinfo file device:filename

 
Syntax Description

device:filename

Specifies the flash device and file name to be used for storing the diagnostic information. The colon is required.

 
Defaults

Creation of crashinfo files is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global config

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The crashinfo file saves information that helps Cisco technical support representatives to debug problems that caused the Cisco IOS image to fail (crash). The access point writes the crash information to the console at the time of the failure, and the file is created the next time you boot the Cisco IOS image after the failure (instead of while the system is failing). The filename will be filename_yyyymmdd-hhmmss, where y is year, m is month, d is date, h is hour, and s is seconds.

Examples

In this example, the access point creates a crashinfo file called crashdata in the default flash memory device if a system crash occurs:

ap(config)# exception crashinfo file flash:crashinfo
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

exception crashinfo buffersize

Changes the size of the crashinfo buffer.

fixed-slot (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Use the fixed-slot QOS Class interface configuration mode command to configure the CAC 802.11 fixed backoff slot time for a radio interface. Use the no form of the command to remove the setting.

fixed-slot 0-16

no cw-max


Note This command is not supported when operating in repeater mode.


 
Syntax Description

0-16

Specifies the fixed backoff slot time (0 to 16 msec).

 
Defaults

When QoS is enabled, the default fixed-slot settings for access points match the values in Table 2-11 , and the default fixed-slot settings for bridges match the values in Table 2-12 .

Table 2-11 Default QoS Fixed Slot Definitions for Access Points

Class of Service
Fixed Slot Time

Background

7

Best Effort

3

Video <100ms Latency

2

Voice <100ms Latency

2

Table 2-12 Default QoS Fixed Slot Definitions for Bridges

Class of Service
Min Contention Window

Background

7

Best Effort

3

Video <100ms Latency

2

Voice <100ms Latency

2

 
Command Modes

QOS Class interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the CAC 802.11 fixed backoff slot time for the radio interface:

AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# dot11 qos class voice
AP(config-if-qosclass)# fixed-slot 6
 

This example shows how to remove the CAC 802.11 fixed backoff slot time for the radio interface:

AP(config-if-qosclass)# no fixed-slot
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admission-control (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC admission control is required for the radio interface.

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC traffic is enabled for the radio interface.

cw-max (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC maximum contention window size for the radio interface.

transmit-op (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC transmit opportunity time for the radio interface.

fragment-threshold

Use the fragment-threshold configuration interface command to set the size at which packets are fragmented. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to defaults.

[no] fragment-threshold 256-2346

 
Syntax Description

256-2346

Specifies the packet fragment threshold size (256 to 2346 bytes)

 
Defaults

The default threshold is 2346 bytes

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to set the packet fragment threshold size to 1800 bytes:

AP(config-if)# fragment-threshold 1800
 

This example shows how to reset the packet fragment threshold size to defaults:

AP(config-if)# no fragment-threshold

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

group (local server configuration mode)

Use the group local server configuration mode command to enter user group configuration mode and configure a user group to which you can assign shared settings. In user group configuration mode you can specify settings for the user group such as VLAN and SSID.

group group


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies the name of the user group

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Local server configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to create a user group on the local authenticator:

AP(config-radsrv)# group hoosiers
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

nas (local server configuration mode)

Adds an access point to the list of NAS access points on the local authenticator

radius-server local

Enables the access point as a local authenticator and enters local server configuration mode

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

user (local server configuration mode)

Adds a user to the list of users allowed to authenticate to the local authenticator

guard-interval

Use the guard-interval configuration mode command to configure the The 802.11n guard interval. The guard interval is the period in nanoseconds the radio listens between packets. Two settings are available: short (400ns) and long (800ns).

 
Syntax Description

any

Allows the radio to use either short or long guard intervals.

long

Specifies a guard interval of 800ns.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Dot11Radio configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(10b)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to manually set a desired guard interval.

Examples

This example shows how to set a long guard interval on a 2.4-GHz 802.11n radio:

ap#config terminal
ap(config-if)#interface dot11radio0
ap(config-if)#guard-interval long
ap(config-if)#end
ap#copy running-config startup-config

 
Related Commands

None

guest-mode (SSID configuration mode)

Use the guest-mode SSID configuration mode command to configure the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support guest mode. Use the no form of the command to disable the guest mode.

[no] guest-mode

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The access point can have one guest-mode SSID or none at all. The guest-mode SSID is used in beacon frames and response frames to probe requests that specify the empty or wildcard SSID. If no guest-mode SSID exists, the beacon contains no SSID and probe requests with the wildcard SSID are ignored. Disabling the guest mode makes the networks slightly more secure. Enabling the guest mode helps clients that passively scan (do not transmit) associate with the access point. It also allows clients configured without a SSID to associate.

Examples

This example shows how to set the wireless LAN for the specified SSID into guest mode:

AP(config-if-ssid)# guest-mode
 

This example shows how to reset the guest-mode parameter to default values:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no guest-mode

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

iapp path destination

To configure the IAPP path parameters, use the iapp path destination command in global configuration mode.

iapp path destination destination

 
Syntax Description

destination

Name of the destination city

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the destination city in an access point.

AP(config)# iapp path destination Paris

iapp path destination source

To configure the IAPP path parameters, use the iapp path destination source command in global configuration mode.

iapp path destination destination source source

 
Syntax Description

destination

Specifies the name the destination city

source

Specifies the name the source city

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the destination and source cities in an access point.

AP(config)# iapp path destination Paris source SanJose

 

iapp standby mac-address

Use the iapp standby mac-address global configuration command to configure an access point to be in standby mode and specify the monitored access point’s MAC address. Use the no form of this command to disable the access point standby mode.

[no] iapp standby mac-address mac-address


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address (in xxxx.xxxx.xxxx format) of the active access point

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to place the access point in standby mode and indicate the MAC address of the active access point:

AP(config)# iapp standby mac-address 0040.9631.81cf
 

This example shows how to stop or disable the standby mode:

AP(config)# no iapp standby mac-address 0040.9631.81cf

 
Related CommandsYou can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.

Command
Description

iapp standby poll-frequency

Configures the polling interval in standby mode

iapp standby primary-shutdown

Shuts down the radio interface on the monitored access point when the standby access point takes over

iapp standby timeout

Configures the polling timeout value in standby mode

iapp standby poll-frequency

Use the iapp standby poll-frequency global configuration command to configure the standby mode polling interval. Use the no form of this command to clear the access point standby mode poll frequency.

[no] iapp standby poll-frequency sec [mac-address]


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

sec

Specifies the standby mode poll frequency in seconds

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address of an access point

 
Defaults

When you enable hot standby, the default poll frequency is 2 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the standby mode poll frequency of 5 minutes:

AP(config)# iapp standby poll-frequency 300
 

This example shows how to stop or disable the standby mode:

AP(config)# no iapp standby mac-address 0040.9631.81cf

 
Related CommandsYou can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.

Command
Description

iapp standby mac-address

Places the access point into standby mode and identifies the MAC address of the active access point

iapp standby primary-shutdown

Shuts down the radio interface on the monitored access point when the standby access point takes over

iapp standby timeout

Specifies the access point standby mode polling timeout value

iapp standby primary-shutdown

Use the iapp standby primary-shutdown global configuration command to disable the radio interfaces on the monitored access point when the standby access point becomes active. The standby access point sends a Dumb Device Protocol (DDP) message to disable the radios of the monitored access point when it detects a failure (for example, if the standby unit cannot associate to the monitored access point, or if the standby unit detects a link test failure on any of the monitored interfaces).

[no] iapp standby primary-shutdown


Note This command is not supported on bridges.



Note When the monitored access point receives the message to disable its radios it puts the radio interfaces into the admin down state. You must re-enable the radios to bring the radio interfaces back up.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This feature is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the primary shutdown feature on a standby access point:

AP(config)# iapp standby primary-shutdown
 

 
Related CommandsYou can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.

Command
Description

iapp standby mac-address

Places the access point into standby mode and identifies the MAC address of the active access point

iapp standby poll-frequency

Specifies the polling interval in standby mode

iapp standby timeout

Specifies the access point standby mode polling timeout value

iapp standby timeout

Use the iapp standby timeout global configuration command to configure the standby mode polling timeout value. Use the no form of this command to clear the standby mode polling timeout value.

[no] iapp standby timeout sec

 
Syntax Description

sec

Specifies the standby mode polling timeout in seconds

 
Defaults

When you enable hot standby, the default standby timeout is 20 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the standby mode polling timeout of 1 minute:

AP(config)# iapp standby timeout 60
 

This example shows how to clear the standby mode timeout value:

AP(config)# no iapp standby timeout

 
Related CommandsYou can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.

Command
Description

iapp standby mac-address

Places the access point into standby mode and identifies the MAC address of the active access point

iapp standby poll-frequency

Specifies the standby mode polling interval

iapp standby primary-shutdown

Shuts down the radio interface on the monitored access point when the standby access point takes over

ids mfp client

Use the ids mfp client SSID configuration command to enable and explicitly specify the status of MFP-2. To disable MFP-2 on an access point, use the no form of this command.

[no] ids mfp client{[required | optional] }

 
Syntax Description

required

MFP-2 is mandatory for a client to authenticate to an access point.

optional

MFP-2 is optional for a client to authenticate to an access point. In this case both MFP-2 enabled and disabled clients can authenticate and associate to an access point.

 
Defaults

By default, MFP-2 is disabled.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(3g)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable MFP-2 for mandatory authentication:

AP(config-if-ssid)# ids mfp client required
 

This example shows how to enable MFP-2 for optional authentication:

AP(config-if-ssid) ids mfp client optional

information-element ssidl (SSID configuration mode)

Use the information-element ssidl SSID configuration command to designate an SSID for inclusion in an SSIDL information element (IE) that the access point includes in beacons. When you designate an SSID to be included in an SSIDL IE, client devices detect that the SSID is available, and they also detect the security settings required to associate using that SSID.

[no] information-element ssidl {[advertisement] [wps]}


Note When multiple basic SSIDs are enabled on the access point, the SSIDL IE does not contain a list of SSIDs; it contains only extended capabilities.


 
Syntax Description

advertisement

Includes the SSID name and capabilities in the access point SSIDL IE.

wps

Sets the WPS capability flag in the SSIDL IE.

 
Defaults

By default, the access point does not include SSIDL IEs in beacons.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to designate an SSID for inclusion in the WPS IE:

AP(config-if-ssid)# information-element ssidl advertisement wps

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Assigns an SSID to a specific interface.

infrastructure-client

Use the infrastructure-client configuration interface command to configure a virtual interface for a workgroup bridge client. Use the no form of the command to disable the workgroup bridge client virtual interface.

[no] infrastructure-client


Note Enter this command on an access point or bridge. This command is not supported on devices configured as workgroup bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The default is infrastructure client disabled.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Enable the infrastructure client feature to increase the reliability of multicast messages to workgroup bridges. When enabled, the access point sends directed packets containing the multicasts, which are retried if necessary, to the associated workgroup bridge. Enable only when necessary because it can greatly increase the load on the radio cell.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a virtual interface for a workgroup bridge client.

AP(config-if)# infrastructure-client
 

This example shows how to specify that a workgroup bridge client virtual interface is not supported.

AP(config-if)# no infrastructure-client

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays information on the current running access point configuration

infrastructure-ssid (SSID configuration mode)

Use the infrastructure-ssid command in SSID configuration mode to reserve this SSID for infrastructure associations, such as those from one access point or bridge to another. Use the no form of the command to revert to a normal non-infrastructure SSID.

[ no ] infrastructure-ssid [ optional ]

 
Syntax Description

optional

Specifies that both infrastructure and mobile client devices are allowed to associate using the SSID

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command controls the SSID that access points and bridges use when associating with one another. A root access point only allows a repeater access point to associate using the infrastructure SSID. A root bridge only allows a non-root bridge to associate using the infrastructure SSID. Repeater access points and non-root bridges use this SSID to associate with root devices. The infrastructure SSID must be assigned to the native VLAN. It cannot be assigned a non-native VLAN.

For configurations using the CLI, the infrastructure-ssid command is not a requirement unless multiple SSIDs are configured on the radio. In this case the infrastructure-ssid command is used to identify the SSID a non-root bridge uses to connect to the uplink. Other non-infrastructure SSIDs are used for client association to the non-root bridge.

However, using the GUI requires that the infrastructure ssid be configured for repeaters, workgroup bridges, and non-root bridges. The goal of the CLI is to provide the maximum flexibility while the GUI provides the minimum working configuration for the purpose of ease of use.

Examples

This example shows how to reserve the specified SSID for infrastructure associations on the wireless LAN:

AP(config-if-ssid)# infrastructure-ssid
 

This example shows how to restore the SSID to non-infrastructure associations:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no infrastructure-ssid

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

interface dot11 (LBS configuration mode)

Use the interface dot11 location based services (LBS) configuration mode command to specify the radio interface on which an LBS profile is enabled. An LBS profile remains inactive until you enter this command.

[no] interface dot11 {0 | 1}

 
Syntax Description

{0 | 1}

Specifies the radio interface. The 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0, and the 5-GHz radio is radio 1.

 
Defaults

LBS profiles are disabled by default.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the radio interface for an LBS profile:

ap(dot11-lbs)# interface dot11 0
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

channel-match (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies that the LBS packet sent by an LBS tag must match the radio channel on which the access point receives the packet

dot11 lbs

Creates an LBS profile and enters LBS configuration mode

method (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the location method used in an LBS profile

multicast address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the multicast address that LBS tag devices use when they send LBS packets

packet-type (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the LBS packet type accepted in an LBS profile

server-address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the IP address of the location server on your network

interface dot11radio

Use the interface dot11radio global configuration command to place access point into the radio configuration mode.

interface dot11radio interface-number

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number (The 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0, and the 5-GHz radio is radio 1.)

 
Defaults

The default radio interface number is 0.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to place the access point into the radio configuration mode:

AP# interface dot11radio 0

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays the radio interface configuration and statistics

ip admission web_passthrough

To enable a web pass-through, use the ip admission web_passthrough command in interface configuration mode.

ip admission web_passthrough

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable a web pass-through:

ap(config-if)#ip admission web_passthrough

ip cef

To enable Cisco Express Forwarding, use the ip cef command.

ip cef accounting {load-balance-hash {non-recursive {per-prefix prefix-length | prefix-length per-prefix } | per-prefix | prefix-length} load-sharing algorithm {include-ports {destination Fixed ID | source { Fixed ID | {destination Fixed ID }} | original | tunnel Fixed ID | universal Fixed ID } | optimize neighbor resolution | traffic-statistics {load-interval seconds | update-rate seconds }

 
Syntax Description

accounting

Enables CEF accounting.

load-balance-hash

Enables load balance hash accounting.

non-recursive

Enables accounting for traffic through non-recursive prefixes.

per-prefix

Enables per prefix accounting.

prefix-length

Enables prefix length accounting.

load-sharing

Enables load sharing.

algorithm

Enables per-destination load sharing algorithm selection.

include-ports

Enables an algorithm that includes layer 4 ports.

destination

Uses the destination port in hash function.

Fixed ID

Specifies the destination port-id.

source

Uses the source port in hash function.

original

Enables the original algorithm.

tunnel

Enables the algorithm for use in tunnel only environments.

universal

Enables the algorithm for use in most environments.

optimize

Enables optimizations.

neighbor

Enables optimizations for directly connected neighbors.

resolution

Triggers layer 2 address resolution directly from CEF.

traffic-statistics

Enables collection of traffic statistics.

load-interval

Specifies the interval for load calculation.

seconds

Specifies the load interval delay in seconds. The load interval must be in multiples of 30.

update-rate

Specifies the update rate for non-recursive prefix stats.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(3) JAB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable Cisco Express Forwarding

:AP(config)# ip cef traffic-statistics load-interval 30

ip igmp snooping vlan

To enable IGMP snooping on a Catalyst VLAN, use the ip igmp snooping vlan command.

[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id


Note If there is no multicast router for processing IGMP query and response from the host, it is mandatory that no ip igmp snooping be configured on the access point. When IGMP snooping is enabled, all multicast group traffic must send IGMP query and response. If an IGMP query or response is not detected, all multicast traffic for that group is dropped.


 
Syntax Description

vlan id

Specifies the Catalyst VLAN number.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable IGMP snooping on a Catalyst VLAN:

AP(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 1
 

This example shows how to disable IGMP snooping on a Catalyst VLAN:

AP(config)# no ip igmp snooping vlan 1
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show ip igmp snooping groups

Displays IGMP snooping group information.

 

ip redirection

Use the ip redirection SSID configuration mode command to enable IP redirection for an SSID. When you configure IP redirection for an SSID, the access point redirects packets sent from client devices associated to that SSID to a specific IP address. IP redirection is used mainly on wireless LANs serving handheld devices that use a central software application and are statically configured to communicate with a specific IP address.

You can redirect all packets from client devices associated using an SSID or redirect only packets directed to specific TCP or UDP ports (as defined in an access control list). When you configure the access point to redirect only packets addressed to specific ports, the access point redirects those packets from clients using the SSID and drops all other packets from clients using the SSID.


Note When you perform a ping test from the access point to a client device that is associated using an IP-redirect SSID, the response packets from the client are redirected to the specified IP address and are not received by the access point.


[no] ip redirection {host ip-address [access-group { access-list-number | access-list-name } in]}

 
Syntax Description

ip-address

Specifies the IP address to which packets are redirected. If you do not specify an access control list (ACL) which defines TCP or UDP ports for redirection, the access point redirects all packets that it receives from client devices.

access-list-number

Specifies the number of the ACL used for packet redirection.

access-list-name

Specifies the name of the ACL used for packet redirection.

in

Specifies that the ACL is applied to the access point’s incoming interface.

 
Defaults

IP redirection is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure IP redirection for an SSID without applying an ACL. The access point redirects all packets that it receives from client devices associated to the SSID zorro:

AP# configure terminal
AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# ssid zorro
AP(config-if-ssid)# ip redirection host 10.91.104.91
AP(config-if-ssid-redirect)# end
 
This example shows how to configure IP redirection only for packets sent to the specific TCP and UDP ports specified in an ACL. When the access point receives packets from client devices associated using the SSID robin, it redirects packets sent to the specified ports and discards all other packets:
 
AP# configure terminal
AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# ssid zorro
AP(config-if-ssid)# ip redirection host 10.91.104.91 access-group redirect-acl in
AP(config-if-ssid)# end
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Configure an SSID for the access point radio

ip SSH version

To specify the protocol version to be supported, use the ip SSH version command in configuration mode.

ip SSH version

 
Syntax Description

version

Specifies the protocol version to be supported. The valid versions are 1 and 2.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the protocol version to be supported:

ap(config)# ip ssh version 1

ipv6 access-list

To configure the IPv6 access list globally, use the command ipv6 access-list in BVI interface mode.

ipv6 access-list | default | deny | evaluate | exit | no | permit | remark | sequence

 
Syntax Description

default

Sets the command to its defaults.

deny

Specifies the packets to reject.

evaluate

Evaluates an access list.

exit

Exits from access-list configuration mode.

no

Negates the command or set its defaults.

permit

Specifies that packets are to be forwarded.

remark

Assigns access list entry comments.

sequence

Specifies a sequence number for the entry

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to set a command to its defaults:

ap(config)# ipv6 access-list XYZ
ap(config-ipv6-acl)# default

 

This example shows how to specify packets to reject:

ap(config)# ipv6 access-list XYZ
ap(config-ipv6-acl)# deny tcp

 

This example shows how to evaluate an access list:

ap(config)# ipv6 access-list XYZ
ap(config-ipv6-acl)# evaluate XYZ

 

ipv6 address autoconfig

To enable stateless autoconfiguration, use the ipv6 address autoconfig command in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 address autoconfig

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BV1 interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable stateless autoconfiguration:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 address autoconfig

 

ipv6 address dhcp rapid-commit

To enable the dhcpv6 client, use the ipv6 address dhcp rapid-commit command in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 address dhcp rapid-commit

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the dhcpv6 client:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 address dhcp rapid-commit

ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local

To configure a link-local address, use the ipv6 address ipv6-address [eui-64] link-local command in BV1 interface.

ipv6 address X:X:X:X::X [eui-64] link-local

 
Syntax Description

X:X:X:X::X

IPv6 link-local address.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a link-local address:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 address FE80:123::123 link-local

ipv6 nd autoconfig

To configure Neighbor Discovery-derived default router, use the ipv6 nd autoconfig command in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 nd autoconfig {default-route| prefix}

 
Syntax Description

default-route

Sends a router solicitation message to solicit a router advertisement.

prefix

Installs the prefix in the RIB.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure Neighbor Discovery-derived default router:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 nd autoconfig default-route

 

This example shows how to install the prefix in the RIB:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 ipv6 nd autoconfig prefix

 

ipv6 nd cache

To configure the time before an IPv6 neighbor discovery cache entry expires, use the ipv6 nd cache command in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 nd cache {expire seconds | interface-limit value }

 
Syntax Description

expire

Configures the expiry time for Neighbour Discovery entries. Valid range is from 1 to 65536 seconds.

interface-limit

Specifies the limit on the number of entries for each interface. Valid range is from 1 to 4294967295.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the time before an IPv6 neighbor discovery cache entry expires:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 nd cache expire 25

 

This example shows how to specify the number of entries for each interface:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 nd cache interface-limit 100

 

ipv6 nd dad

To configure the number of attempts and the interval between consecutive neighbor solicitation messages that are sent on an interface for duplicate address detection, use the ipv6 nd dad command in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 nd dad {attempts value | time ms }

 
Syntax Description

attempts

Specifies IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection Transmits, in seconds. Valid range is from 0 to 600.

time

Specifies IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection Time, in milliseconds. Valid range is from 1 to 600.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection Transmits:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 nd dad attempts 50

 

This example shows how to specify IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection Time:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 nd dad time 200

 

ipv6 nd na glean

To configure the neighbor discovery to glean an entry from an unsolicited neighbor advertisement, use the ipv6 nd na glean command in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 nd na glean

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the neighbor discovery to glean an entry from an unsolicited neighbor advertisement:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 nd na glean

 

ipv6 nd ns-interval

To specify the time interval between IPv6 neighbor solicitation retransmissions on an interface, use the ipv6 nd ns-interval in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 nd ns-interval ms

 
Syntax Description

ns-interval

Specifies the time interval between the IPv6 neighbor solicitation retransmission attempts, in milliseconds. Valid range is from 1000 to 172800000.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the time interval between IPv6 neighbor solicitation retransmissions on an interface:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 nd ns-interval 2550

ipv6 nd reachable-time

To specify the time that a remote IPv6 node is reachable, use the ipv6 nd reachable-time command in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 nd reachable-time ms

 
Syntax Description

reachable-time

Specifies the time that a remote IPv6 node is reachable, in milliseconds. Valid range is from 0 to 3600000.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the time that a remote IPv6 node is reachable:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 nd reachable-time 2500

 

ipv6 traffic-filter

To assign the globally configured ACL to the outbound and inbound traffic in the Layer 3 interface, use the ipv6 traffic-filter acl-name command in BV1 interface mode.

ipv6 traffic-filter acl-name

 
Syntax Description

acl-name

Access-list name.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to assign the globally configured ACL to the outbound and inbound traffic in the Layer 3 interface:

ap(config-if)# ipv6 traffic-filter XYZ

 

l2-filter bridge-group-acl

Use the l2-filter b ridge-group-acl configuration interface command to apply a Layer 2 ACL filter to the bridge group incoming and outgoing packets between the access point and the host (upper layer). Use the no form of the command to disable the Layer 2 ACL filter.

[no] l2-filter bridge-group-acl

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to apply a Layer 2 ACL filter to the bridge group packets:

AP(config-if)# l2-filter bridge-group-acl
 
This example shows how to activate a Layer 2 ACL filter:
AP(config-if)# no l2-filter bridge-group-acl
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge-group port-protected

Enables protected port for public secure mode configuration

show bridge

Displays information on the bridge group or classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database

show bridge group

Displays information about configured bridge groups

l2-filter-block-arp

Use the l2-filter block-arp command on radio interface to block all ARP requests whose target L3-address is the access point IP address.

The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to dynamically map physical hardware addresses to an IP address. Network devices and workstations maintain internal tables in which these mappings are stored for some period of time.

l2-filter block-arp

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This feature is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7) JA2

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to apply a l2-filter block-arp command to a radio interface:

interface Dot11Radio0
(config-if)#l2-filter block-arp

 

led display

Use the led display global configuration command to reduce the brightness or to turn-off the Status LED on the Cisco Aironet 1130AG access point. Use the no form of the command to return the Status LED to full intensity operation.

[no] led display {off | dim}

 
Syntax Description

off

Turns-off the Status LED.

dim

Reduces the brightness of the Status LED.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to reduce the brightness of the 1130AG Status LED:

AP(oonfig)# led display dim
 
This example shows how to turn-off the 1130AG Status LED:
 
AP(config)# led display off
 

This example shows how to turn-on the 1130AG Status LED.

AP(config)# no led display off
 

This example shows how to return the 1130AG Status LED to full brightness operation.

AP(config)# no led display dim
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the contents of the currently running configuration file.

led flash

Use the led flash privileged EXEC command to start or stop the blinking of the LED indicators on the access point for a specified number of seconds. Without arguments, this command blinks the LEDs continuously.

led flash [ seconds | disable]

 
Syntax Description

seconds

Specifies the number of seconds (1 to 3600) that the LEDs blink

disable

Stops the blinking of the LEDs

 
Defaults

The default is continuous blinking of the LEDs.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to blink the access point LEDs for 30 seconds:

AP# led flash 30
 
This example shows how to stop the blinking of the access point LEDs:
 
AP# led flash disable

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show led flash

Displays the blinking status of the LEDs

logging buffered

Use the logging buffered global configuration command to begin logging of messages to an internal buffer. Use the no form of this command to stop logging messages.

[no] logging buffered [ size ] [ severity ]

 
Syntax Description

size

Specifies the size of the internal buffer (4096 to 2147483647 bytes)

severity

Specifies the message severity to log (1-7)

Severity 1: alerts

Severity 2: critical

Severity 3: errors

Severity 4: warnings

Severity 5: notifications

Severity 6: informational

Severity 7: debugging

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to begin logging severity 3 messages to an internal 5000-byte buffer:

AP(config)# logging buffered 5000 3
 

This example shows how to stop the message logging:

AP(config)# no logging buffered

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show logging

Displays recent logging event headers or complete events

clear logging

Clears logging status count and the trace buffer

logging snmp-trap

Use the logging snmp-trap global configuration command to specify the severity level of syslog messages for which the access point sends SNMP traps.

[no] logging snmp-trap severity

 
Syntax Description

severity

Specifies the severity levels for which the access point sends SNMP traps. You can enter a range of severity levels--0 through 7--or a single severity level.

To specify a single severity level, enter emergencies (level 0), alerts (level 1), critical (level 2), errors (level 3), warnings (level 4), notifications (level 5), informational (level 6), or debugging (level 7).

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

For the logging snmp-trap command to operate correctly, you must also configure these global configuration commands on the access point:

AP(config)# logging history severity
AP(config)# snmp-server enable traps
AP(config)# snmp-server host address syslog
 

Examples

This example shows how to configure the access point to send SNMP traps for all severity levels:

AP(config)# logging snmp-trap 0 7
 

This example shows how to configure the access point to send SNMP traps only for warning messages:

AP(config)# logging snmp-trap warnings
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

logging buffered

Controls logging of messages to an internal buffer

show logging

Displays recent logging event headers or complete events

clear logging

Clears logging status count and the trace buffer

match (class-map configuration)

Use the match class-map configuration command to define the match criteria to classify traffic. Use the no form of this command to remove the match criteria.

[no] match { access-group acl-index-or-name |
ip [dscp dscp-list | precedence precedence-list] |
vlan vlan-id}

 
Syntax Description

access-group acl-index-or-name

Specifies the number or name of an IP standard or extended access control list (ACL) or MAC ACL. For an IP standard ACL, the ACL index ranges are 1 to 99 and 1300 to 1999. For an IP extended ACL, the ACL index ranges are100 to 199 and 2000 to 2699.

ip dscp dscp-list

Specifies a list of up to eight IP Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values to match against incoming packets. Separate each value with a space. The range is 0 to 63.

ip precedence precedence-list

Specifies a list of up to eight IP-precedence values to match against incoming packets. Separate each value with a space. The range is 0 to 7.

vlan vlan-id

Specifies the virtual LAN identification number. Valid IDs are from 1 to 4095; do not enter leading zeros.


Note Though visible in the command-line help strings, the any, class-map, destination-address, input-interface, mpls, not, protocol, and source-address keywords are not supported.


 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Class-map configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the class-map global configuration command to enter the class-map configuration mode. The match command in the class-map configuration mode is used to specify which fields in the incoming packets are examined to classify the packets. Only the IP access group or the MAC access group matching to the Ether Type/Len are supported.

You can use the match ip dscp dscp-list command only in a policy map that is attached to an egress interface.

Only one match command per class map is supported.

For the match ip dscp dscp-list or the match ip precedence ip-precedence-list command, you can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly used value. For example, you can enter the match ip dscp af11 command, which is the same as entering the match ip dscp 10 command. You can enter the match ip precedence critical command, which is the same as entering the match ip precedence 5 command. For a list of supported mnemonics, enter the match ip dscp ? or the match ip precedence ? command to see the command-line help strings.

Examples

This example shows how to create a class map called class2, which matches all the incoming traffic with DSCP values of 10, 11, and 12:

AP(config)# class-map class2
AP(config-cmap)# match ip dscp 10 11 12
AP(config-cmap)# exit
 

This example shows how to create a class map called class3, which matches all the incoming traffic with IP-precedence values of 5, 6, and 7:

AP(config)# class-map class3
AP(config-cmap)# match ip precedence 5 6 7
AP(config-cmap)# exit
 

This example shows how to delete the IP-precedence match criteria and to classify traffic by vlan:

AP(config)# class-map class2
AP(config-cmap)# match ip precedence 5 6 7
AP(config-cmap)# no match ip precedence
AP(config-cmap)# match vlan 2
AP(config-cmap)# exit
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify

show class-map

Displays quality of service (QoS) class maps

max-associations (SSID configuration mode)

Use the max-associations SSID configuration mode command to configure the maximun number of associations supported by the radio interface (for the specified SSID). Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to the default value.

[no] max-associations value

 
Syntax Description

value

Specifies the maximum number (1 to 255) of associations supported

 
Defaults

This default maximum is 255.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to set the maximum number of associations to 5 on the wireless LAN for the specified SSID:

AP(config-if-ssid)# max-associations 5
 

This example shows how to reset the maximum number of associations to the default value:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no max-associations

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

mbssid

Use the mbssid configuration interface command to enable multiple basic SSIDs on an access point radio interface.

[no] mbssid


Note This command is supported only on radio interfaces that support multiple BSSIDs. To determine whether a radio supports multiple BSSIDs, enter the show controllers radio_interface command. Multiple BSSIDs are supported if the results include this line:
Number of supported simultaneous BSSID on radio_interface: 8


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable multiple BSSIDs on a radio interface:

ap(config-if)# mbssid
 

To enable multiple BSSIDs on all radio interfaces, use the dot11 mbssid global configuration command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 mbssid

Enables multiple BSSIDs on all radio interfaces that support multiple BSSIDs

mbssid (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies that a BSSID is included in beacons and specifies a DTIM period for the BSSID

show dot11 bssid

Displays configured BSSIDs

mbssid (SSID configuration mode)

Use the mbssid SSID configuration mode command to include the SSID name in the beacon and broadcast probe response and to configure the DTIM period for the SSID.

[no] mbssid [guest-mode] [dtim-period period ]


Note This command is supported only on radio interfaces that support multiple basic SSIDs. To determine whether a radio supports multiple basic SSIDs, enter the show controllers radio_interface command. Multiple basic SSIDs are supported if the results include this line:
Number of supported simultaneous BSSID on radio_interface: 8


 
Syntax Description

guest-mode

Specifies that the SSID is included in beacons.

dtim-period period

Specifies the rate at which the device sends a beacon that contains a Delivery Traffic Indicator Message (DTIM). Enter a beacon rate between 1 and 100.

 
Defaults

Guest mode is disabled by default. The default period is 2, which means that every other beacon contains a DTIM.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The guest mode and DTIM period configured in this command are applied only when MBSSIDs are enabled on the radio interface.

When client devices receive a beacon that contains a DTIM, they normally wake up to check for pending packets. Longer intervals between DTIMs let clients sleep longer and preserve power. Conversely, shorter DTIM periods reduce the delay in receiving packets but use more battery power because clients wake up more often.


Note Increasing the DTIM period count delays the delivery of multicast packets. Because multicast packets are buffered, large DTIM period counts can cause a buffer overflow.


If you configure a DTIM period for a BSSID and you also use the beacon command to configure a DTIM period for the radio interface, the BSSID DTIM period takes precedence.

Examples

This example shows how to include a BSSID in the beacon:

AP(config-if-ssid)# mbssid guest-mode
 

This example shows how to configure a DTIM period for a BSSID:

AP(config-if-ssid)# mbssid dtim-period 5
 

This example shows how to include a BSSID in the beacon and to configure a DTIM period:

AP(config-if-ssid)# mbssid guest-mode dtim-period 5
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 mbssid

Enables BSSIDs on all radio interfaces that support multiple BSSIDs

mbssid

Enables BSSIDs on a specific radio interface

show dot11 bssid

Displays configured BSSIDs

method (eap profile configuration mode)

Use the method EAP profile configuration mode command to enable method types used in an EAP profile. Use the no form of the command to disable the EAP method.

[no] method [fast] [gtc] [leap] [md5] [mschapv2] [tls]

 
Syntax Description

fast

Specifies the EAP-FAST method of authentication.

gtc

Specifies the EAP-GTC method of authentication.

leap

Specifies the EAP-LEAP method of authentication.

md5

Specifies the EAP-MD5 method of authentication.

mschapv2

Specifies the EAP-MSCHAPV2 method of authentication.

tls

Specifies the EAP-TLS method of authentication.


Note EAP-GTC, EAP-MD5, and EAP-MSCHAPV2 should not be used as the primary authentication method.


 
Defaults

There is no default for this command.

 
Command Modes

EAP profile configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the EAP-FAST method for the EAP test profile:

AP(config)# eap profile test
AP(config-eap-profile)#method fast
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

eap profile

Configures an EAP profile and enters into EAP profile configuration mode.

dot1x eap profile

Configures an EAP profile for an interface.

show eap regristrations

Displays the EAP registrations.

show eap sessions

Displays the EAP sessions.

method (LBS configuration mode)

Use the method location based services (LBS) configuration mode command to specify the location method used in an LBS profile.

method method

 
Syntax Description

method

Specifies the location method used by the access point. In this release, rssi (in which the access point measures the location packet’s received signal strength indication) is the only option and is also the default.

 
Defaults

The default location method is RSSI.

 
Command Modes

LBS configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the location method used in the LBS profile:

ap(dot11-lbs)# method rssi
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

channel-match (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies that the LBS packet sent by an LBS tag must match the radio channel on which the access point receives the packet

dot11 lbs

Creates an LBS profile and enters LBS configuration mode

interface dot11 (LBS configuration mode)

Enables an LBS profile on a radio interface

multicast address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the multicast address that LBS tag devices use when they send LBS packets

packet-type (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the LBS packet type accepted in an LBS profile

server-address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the IP address of the location server on your network

mobile station

Use the mobile station configuration interface command to configure a bridge or a workgroup bridge as a mobile device. When you enable this setting on a device in non-root or workgroup bridge mode, the device scans for a new parent association when it encounters a poor Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), excessive radio interference, or a high frame-loss percentage. Using these criteria, a bridge configured as a mobile station searches for a new parent association and roams to a new parent before it loses its current association. When the mobile station setting is disabled (the default setting) the bridge does not search for a new association until it loses its current association.

[no] mobile station [period] [threshold] [scan] [ignore neighbor-list] [minimum-rate]

 
Syntax Description

period

Determines how fast the device scans for a new parent after it associates to a new poor connection or has had a previous scan triggered with the current association.

threshold

Sets the dBm that triggers the algorithm to scan for a better parent. Threshold should be set to noise + 20 dBm, but not more than + 70 dBm

scan

Limits the channels scanned by the device to those specified.

ignore neighbor-list

Workgroup bridge ignores CCX neighbor list reports such as access point adjacent or enhanced neighbor list reports. This command is valid only in the case where the workgroup bridge is configured for limited channel scanning.

minimum-rate

Sets the minimum data rate below which the WGB restarts the scanning. If a minimum rate is configured on the WGB, the root AP will be rejected only if the current rate goes below the configured minimum rate. The minimum rate can be set to any of the WGB supported rates.

 
Defaults

This command is disabled by default.

The default period is 20 seconds.

The default threshold is 70 dBm.

There is no default for the minimum-rate parameter.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

12.3(2)JA

Support added for 1100 series access points in workgroup bridge mode.

12.3(4)JA

Support added for 1200 series access points in workgroup bridge mode.

12.4(3g)JA & 12.3(8)JEB

Added limited scanning and neighbor list manipulation. Support added for 1130, and 1240 access points.

12.4(25d)JA

Added minimum-rate manipulation. Support added for access point in workgroup bridge.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command can prevent data loss on a mobile workgroup bridge or bridge by ensuring that the bridge roams to a new parent device before it loses its current association.

Examples

This example shows how to specify that a bridge is a mobile station and sets the period and threshold to 20 seconds and 70 dBm:

BR(config-if)# mobile-station period 20 threshold 70
 

This example shows how to specify a scan for channels 1 and 6:

BR(config-if)# mobile-station scan 1 6
 

This example shows how to set a minimum rate of MCS rate index 15, below which the AP is rejected:

BR(config-if)# mobile-station minimum-rate m15

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

mobility network-id

Use the mobility network-id SSID configuration mode command to associate an SSID to a Layer 3 mobility network ID. Use the no form of the command to disassociate the SSID from the mobility network ID.

[no] mobility network-id network-id

 
Syntax Description

network-id

Specifies the Layer 3 mobility network identification number for the SSID

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to an SSID with a Layer 3 mobility network ID:

AP(config-if-ssid)# mobility network-id 7
 

This example shows how to reset the VLAN parameter to default values:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no mobility network-id
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

wlccp authentication-server

Enables Layer 3 mobility on the access point

multicast address (LBS configuration mode)

Use the multicast address location based services (LBS) configuration mode command to specify the multicast address that LBS tag devices use when they send LBS packets.

multicast address mac-address

 
Syntax Description

mac-address

Specifies the multicast address that LBS tag devices use when they send LBS packets.

 
Defaults

The default multicast address is 01:40:96:00:00:10.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the multicast address used in the LBS profile:

ap(dot11-lbs)# multicast address 01.40.96.00.00.10
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

channel-match (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies that the LBS packet sent by an LBS tag must match the radio channel on which the access point receives the packet

dot11 lbs

Creates an LBS profile and enters LBS configuration mode

interface dot11 (LBS configuration mode)

Enables an LBS profile on a radio interface

method (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the location method used in an LBS profile

packet-type (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the LBS packet type accepted in an LBS profile

server-address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the IP address of the location server on your network

nas (local server configuration mode)

Use the nas local server configuration mode command to add an access point to the list of devices that use the local authenticator.

nas ip-address key shared-key

 
Syntax Description

ip-address

Specifies the IP address of the NAS access point

shared-key

Specifies the shared key used to authenticate communication between the local authenticator and other access points. You must enter this shared key on the access points that use the local authenticator.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Local server configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to add an access point to the list of NAS access points on the local authenticator:

AP(config-radsrv)# nas 10.91.6.158 key 110337
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

group (local server configuration mode)

Creates a user group on the local authenticator and enters user group configuration mode

radius-server local

Enables the access point as a local authenticator and enters local server configuration mode

user (local server configuration mode)

Adds a user to the list of users allowed to authenticate to the local server

packet max-retries

Use the packet max-retries configuration interface command to specify the maximum number of attempts per non-best-effort data packet before discarding the packet. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to defaults.

[no] packet max-retries number 1 number 2
fail-threshold number 3 number 4
priority value
drop-packet

 
Syntax Description

max-retries number 1 number 2

Specifies the maximum number (0 to 128) of non-best-effort data packet retries before discarding the packet. number 1 retries is used if number 3 fail-threshold has not exceeded and number 2 retries is used if number 3 fail-threshold has been exceeded. number 1 default is 3 and number 2 default is 0

fail-threshold number 3 number 4

Specifies the thresholds for the maximum number of consecutive dropped packets (0 to 1000). number 3 fail-threshold is used to switch max-retries from number 1 to number 2 as described above. If number 4 fail-threshold has exceeded, the client will be disassociated. number 3 default is 100 and number 4 default is 500.

priority value

Specifies the QOS user priority (1 to 7). value does not have a default value.

drop-packet

Specifies that priority packets should not be retried and that the packets should be dropped when the maximum number of retries has been reached.

 
Defaults

number 1 default is 3, number 2 default is 0, number 3 default is 100, number 4 default is 500, value does not have a default and drop-packet default is no, that is - non-best-effort data packets will not be discarded.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the packet max-retries.

AP(config)#interface dot11radio 1
AP(config-if)# packet max-retries 15 15 fail-threshold 10 10 priority 7 drop-packet
 

This example shows how reset the packet retries to defaults.

AP(config-if)# no packet max-retries 15 15 fail-threshold 10 10 priority 7 drop-packet

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration.

packet retries

Use the packet retries configuration interface command to specify the maximum number of attempts to send a packet. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to defaults.

[no] packet retries 1-128

 
Syntax Description

1-128

Specifies the maximum number of retries (1 to 128)

 
Defaults

The default number of retries is 32.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify 15 as the maximum number of retries.

AP(config-if)# packet retries 15
 

This example shows how reset the packet retries to defaults.

AP(config-if)# no packet retries

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

packet speed

Use the packet speed configuration interface command to specify downlink data rates and priorities for packets which have been declared discard-eligible in the packet max-retries command. Use the no form of the command to disable specified speeds and priorities and to restore the default data rates.

[no] packet speed [rate1....rateN | default]
priority 0-7

 

rate1....rateN

Specifies one or multiple data rates that can be used for packets. Possible data rates are listed below:

  • 802.11b data rates (Mbps)

1.0, 2.0, 5.5, 11.0

  • 802.11g data rates (Mbps)

1.0, 2.0, 5.5, 6.0, 9.0, 11.0, 12.0, 18.0. 24.0, 36.0, 48.0, 54.0

  • 802.11a data rates (Mbps)

6.0, 9.0, 11.0, 12.0, 18.0. 24.0, 36.0, 48.0, 54.0

default

Specifies that the default rates are used for packets.

priority 0-7

Specifies the priority (0 to 7)

 
Defaults

802.11b default data rates (Mbps): 5.5, 11.0

802.11a default data rates (Mbps): 6.0, 12.0, 24.0

802.11g default data rates (Mbps): 5.5, 6.0, 11.0, 12.0, 24.0

Priority default is 6(voice). Currently, only priority 6 is allowed pending future releases.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify default packet speeds for priority 7.

AP(config-if)# packet speed default prority 7
 

This example shows how remove packet speeds of 1.0, 2.0, 5.5, 6.0, and 9.0 Mbps data rates at priority 7.

AP(config-if)# no packet speed 1.0 2.0 5.5 6.0 priority 7
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

packet timeout

Use the packet timeout configuration interface command to specify the packet timeout period for a priority. Queued packets whose age has exceeded the timeout threshold will be discarded if they have been declared discard-eligible in the packet max-retries command. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to defaults.

[no] packet timeout 1-128
priority 0-7

 
Syntax Description

1-128

Specifies the packet timeout (1 to 128 milliseconds).

0-7

Specifies the packet priority (0 to 7).

 
Defaults

The timeout default is 35 milliseconds.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify a packet timeout of 12 msec at a priority of 7:

AP(config-if)# packet timeout 12 priority 7
 

This example shows how remove the packet timeout of 12 at a priority of 7:

AP(config-if)# no packet timeout 12 priority 7

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

packet-type (LBS configuration mode)

Use the packet-type location based services (LBS) configuration mode command to specify the LBS packet type that accepted in an LBS profile.

packet-type {extended | short}

 
Syntax Description

extended

Specifies that the access point accepts extended packets from LBS tag devices. An extended packet contains two bytes of LBS information in the frame body. If the packet does not contain those two bytes in the frame body, the access point drops the packet.

short

Specifies that the access point accepts short location packets from LBS tag devices. In short packets, the LBS information is missing from the tag packet’s frame body and the packet indicates the tag’s transmit channel.

 
Defaults

The default packet type is extended.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the packet type used in the LBS profile:

ap(dot11-lbs)# packet-type short
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

channel-match (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies that the LBS packet sent by an LBS tag must match the radio channel on which the access point receives the packet

dot11 lbs

Creates an LBS profile and enters LBS configuration mode

interface dot11 (LBS configuration mode)

Enables an LBS profile on a radio interface

method (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the location method used in an LBS profile

multicast address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the multicast address that LBS tag devices use when they send LBS packets

server-address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the IP address of the location server on your network

parent

Use the parent configuration interface command to add a parent to a list of valid parent access points. Use the no form of the command to remove a parent from the list.

[no] parent 1-4 mac-address

 
Syntax Description

1-4

Specifies the parent root access point number (1 to 4)

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address (in xxxx.xxxx.xxxx format) of a parent access point

 
Defaults

Repeater access point operation is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The parent command adds a parent to the list of valid parent access points. Use this command multiple times to define up to four valid parents. A repeater access point operates best when configured to associate with specific root access points that are connected to the wired LAN.

Examples

This example shows how to set up repeater operation with the parent 1 access point:

AP(config-if)# parent 1 0040.9631.81cf
 

This example shows how to set up repeater operation with the parent 2 access point:

AP(config-if)# parent 2 0040.9631.81da
 

This example shows how to remove a parent from the parent list:

AP(config-if)# no parent 2

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

parent timeout

Sets the parent association timeout

parent timeout

Use the parent timeout configuration interface command to define the amount of time that a repeater tries to associate with a parent access point. Use the no form of the command to disable the timeout.

[no] parent timeout sec

 
Syntax Description

sec

Specifies the amount of time the access point attempts to associate with the specified parent access point (0 to 65535 seconds)

 
Defaults

Parent timeout is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The parent timeout defines how long the access point attempts to associate with a parent in the parent list. After the timeout, another acceptable parent is used. You set up the parent list using the parent command. With the timeout disabled, the parent must come from the parent list.

Examples

This example shows how to set up repeater operation with the parent 1 access point with a timeout of 60 seconds:

AP(config-if)# parent timeout 60
 

This example shows how to disable repeater operation:

AP(config-if)# no parent

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

parent

Specify valid parent access points

password (dot1x credentials configuration mode)

Use the password dot1x credentials configuration mode command to specify dot1x credential user password. Use the no form of the command to disable the password.

[no] password [number] password

 
Syntax Description

number

Specifies the type of password that follows. 0 indicates the password is unencrypted. 7 indicates the password is hidden.

password

Specifies the user password for the dot1x credential.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Dot1x credentials configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify an unencrpted user password for the dot1x credential:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# password 0 1234A45b8
 

This example shows how to specify a hidden user password for the dot1x credential:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# password 7 1234A45b8
 

This example shows how to disable the credential user password:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# no password
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x credentials

Configures dot1x credentials on the access point.

show dot1x credentials

Displays the configured dot1x credentials on the access point.

payload-encapsulation

Use the payload-encapsulation configuration interface command to specify the Ethernet encapsulation type used to format Ethernet data packets that are not formatted using IEEE 802.3 headers. Data packets that are not IEEE 802.3 packets must be reformatted using IEEE 802.1H or RFC1042. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to defaults.

[no] payload-encapsulation
{snap | dot1h}

 
Syntax Description

snap

(Optional) Specifies the RFC1042 encapsulation

dot1h

(Optional) Specifies the IEEE 802.1H encapsulation

 
Defaults

The default payload encapsulation is snap.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the use of IEEE 802.1H encapsulation:

AP(config-if)# payload-encapsulation dot1h
 

This example shows how to reset the parameter to defaults:

AP(config-if)# no payload-encapsulation

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

pki-trustpoint (dot1x credentials configuration mode)

Use the pki-trustpoint dot1x credentials configuration mode command to configure the PKI-Trustpoint for the dot1x credential. Use the no form of the command to disable the PKI-Trustpoint.

[no] pki-trustpoint name

 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies the default PKI-Trustpoint for the dot1x credential.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Dot1x credentials configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify default PKI-Trustpoint for the dot1x credential:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# pki-trustpoint pki101
 

This example shows how to disable the default PKI-Trustpoint:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# no pki-trustpoint
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x credentials

Configures dot1x credentials on the access point.

show dot1x credentials

Displays the configured dot1x credentials on the access point.

power client

Use the power client configuration interface command to configure the maximum power level clients should use for IEEE 802.11b radio transmissions to the access point. The power setting is transmitted to the client device during association with the access point. Use the no form of the command to not specify a power level.

2.4-GHz Radio (802.11b)

[no] power client {1 | 5 | 20 | 30 | 50 | 100 | maximum }2

2.4-GHz Radio (802.11g)

[no] power client {1 | 5 | 10 | 20 | 30 | 50 | 100} | maximum)1

[no] power client {-1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 17 | 20 | maximum }3

5-GHz Radio (802.11a)

[no] power client {5 | 10 | 20 | 40} | maximum }1

[no] power client {-1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 15 | 17 | maximum }2

[no] power client {-1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 15 | maximum }2


Note This command is supported only on access points and the 1300 series bridge.



Note The supported client power levels differ on the various access points and the 1300 series bridge.


 
Syntax Description

For the 802.11b, 2.4-GHz radio:
1, 5, 20, 30, 50, 100, maximum4

For the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radio:
1, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, maximum1

-1, 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 16, 17, 20, maximum5

For 802.11a, 5-GHz radio:
5, 10, 20, 40, maximum1

-1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 15 | 17 | maximum2

-1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 15 | maximum2

Specifies a specific power level in mW or in dBm. Maximum power is regulated by the regulatory domain for the country of operation and is set during manufacture of the access point and client device.

Note The maximum power level allowed depends on the gain of the antenna being used on your access point or bridge and on your regulatory domain.

For a list of maximum power levels allowed in each regulatory domain for the 2.4-GHz radio and the 5-GHz radio, refer to the “Channels and Antenna Settings” section in the hardware installation guide for your access point or bridge.

Note The 802.11g radio transmits at up to 100 mW or 20 dBm for the 1, 2, 5.5, and 11Mbps data rates. However, for the 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54Mbps data rates, the maximum transmit power for the 802.11g radio is 30 mW or 17 dBm.

4.Power settings in mW.

5.Power settings in dBm.

 
Defaults

The default is no power level specification during association with the client.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to specify the desired transmitter power level for clients. Lower power levels reduce the radio cell size and interference between cells. The client software chooses the actual transmit power level, choosing between the lower of the access point value and the locally configured value. The maximum transmit power is limited according to regulatory region.

Examples

This example shows how to specify a 20-mW power level for client devices associated to the access point radio:

AP(config-if)# power client 20
 

This example shows how to disable power level requests:

AP(config-if)# no power client

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

power inline negotiation

Use the power inline negotiation configuration command to configure the Cisco Aironet 1130AG or 1240AG series access point to operate with older switch software that does not support Cisco Intelligent Power Management power negotiations. Use the no form of the command to disable the access point inline power settings.

[no] power inline negotiation {prestandard source |
injector{installed | override | MAC address}}

 
Syntax Description

prestandard source

Specifies that the Cisco switch is running older software that does not support Intelligent Power Management negotiations but is able to supply sufficient power to the access point.

injector installed

Specifies that a power injector is used to supply sufficient power to the access point and that the Cisco switch is running older software that does not support Intelligent Power Management.

injector override

Specifies a power injector is supplying power and the access point is configured to override all inline power checks.


Caution When using the power inline negotiation injector override command, a power injector must always be installed to prevent a possible overload condition with an underpowered power source.

injector MAC address

Specifies that a power injector is supplying power to the access point and the access point is connected to a new switch port with the indicated MAC address. Enter the MAC address (in xxxx.xxxx.xxxx hexadecimal format) of the new switch port where the power injector is connected.

Note This command should only be used when you move an access point and power injector to a different switch port.

 
Defaults

The manufacturing default configuration is power inline negotiation prestandard source. If your switch supports Intelligent Power Management, you should change this setting by using the no power inline negotiation prestandard source command.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

12.3(8)JA

The command was modified to include the installed, override, and MAC address keywords.

 
Usage Guidelines

To help avoid an over-current condition with low power sources and to optimize power usage on Cisco switches, Cisco developed Intelligent Power Management, which uses Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) to allow powered devices (the Cisco Aironet 1130AG and 1240AG series access points) to negotiate with a Cisco switch for sufficient power.

Intelligent Power Management support is dependent on the version of software resident in the Cisco switch that is providing power to the access point. Each Cisco switch should be upgraded to support Intelligent Power Management. Until the software is upgraded, you can configure the access point to operate with older switch software using the power inline negotiation command. Refer to the Troubleshooting section of the hardware installation guide for your access point for additional information.

A power injector can be used to supply power to the Cisco Aironet 1130AG or 1240AG series access point. If your switch supports Intelligent Power Management, the power injector will be detected without the need for any configuration changes on the access point.


Note Cisco switches that do not support inline power can run software that supports Intelligent Power Management. If your Cisco switch software cannot be upgraded, the access point must be reconfigured using the power inline negotiation injector command.



Caution You must cautiously use the power inline negotiation injector override command because this command causes the access point to enter high power mode without performing power checks and can potentially cause an overcurrent condition in underpowered power sources. Always verify that a power injector is correctly installed before using this command.

When an access point was previously configured with a power injector and you relocate the access point to another switch port, you must use the power inline negotiation injector MAC address command with the MAC address of the new switch port. You must verify that the power injector is correctly installed before using this command.

Examples

This example shows how to set up the Cisco Aironet 1130AG or 1240AG series access point to be powered from a Cisco switch that can supply sufficient power but does not support Intelligent Power Management negotiations:

AP(config)# power inline negotiation prestandard source
AP(config)# no power inline negotiation injector
 

This example shows how to set up the Cisco Aironet 1130AG or 1240AG series access point to be powered from a power injector connected to a Cisco switch port that does not support Intelligent Power Management. The access point automatically determines the MAC address of the switch port:

 
AP(config)# no power inline negotiation prestandard source
AP(config)# power inline negotiation injector installed
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current running configuration of the access point, which indicates how the access point is being powered.

power local

Use the power local configuration interface command to configure the access point or bridge radio power level. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to defaults. On the 2.4-GHz, 802.11g radio, you can set Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) power levels and Complementary Code Keying (CCK) power levels. CCK modulation is supported by 802.11b and 802.11g devices. OFDM modulation is supported by 802.11g and 802.11a devices.

2.4-GHz Access Point Radio (802.11b)

[no] power local {1 | 5 | 20 | 30 | 50 | 100 | maximum}6

2.4-GHz Access Point Radio (802.11g)

[no] power local cck {1 | 5 | 10 | 20 | 30 | 50 | 100 | maximum}1

[no] power local cck {-1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 15 | 17 | 20 | maximum}7

[no] power local ofdm {1 | 5 | 10 | 20 | 30 | maximum}1

[no] power local ofdm {-1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 17 | maximum}2

5-GHz Access Point Radio (801.11a)

[no] power local {5 | 10 | 20 | 40 | maximum}1

[no] power local { -1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 15 | maximum }2

[no] power local { -1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 15 | 17 | maximum }2

1400 Series Bridge 5.8-GHz Radio

[no] power local {12 | 15 | 18 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | maximum}2


Note The maximum transmit power depends on your regulatory domain and the antenna gain for your access point or bridge. For additional information refer to the “Channels and Antenna Settings” section of the hardware installation guide for your access point or bridge.



Note The supported transmit power levels differ on the various access points and bridges.



Note This command requires the radio to be turned on and enabled to determine valid power settings allowed on your access point radio.


 
Syntax Description

For the 802.11b, 2.4-GHz access point radio:
1, 5, 20, 30, 50, 100, or maximum8

For the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz access point radio:
1, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or maximum

1, 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 15, 17, 20, or maximum9

1 | 5 | 10 | 20 | 30 | maximum1

-1 | 2 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 14 | 17 | maximum2

For the 5-GHz access point radio:
5, 10, 20, 40, or maximum1

-1, 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 15, or maximum2

-1, 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 15, 17, or maximum2

For the 5.8-GHz 1400 series bridge radio:
12, 15, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24, or maximum2

Specifies access point power setting in mW or in dBm. Maximum power is regulated by the regulatory domain for the country of operation and is set during manufacture of the access point and client device.

Note The maximum power level allowed depends on the gain of the antenna being used on your access point or bridge and on your regulatory domain.

For a list of maximum power levels allowed in each regulatory domain for the 2.4-GHz radio and the 5-GHz radio, refer to the “Channels and Antenna Settings” section in the hardware installation guide for your access point or bridge.

Note The 802.11g radio transmits at up to 100 mW or 20 dBm for the 1, 2, 5.5, and 11Mbps data rates. However, for the 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54Mbps data rates, the maximum transmit power for the 802.11g radio is 30 mW or 17 dBm.

8.Power settings in mW.

9.Power settings in dBm.

 
Defaults

The default local power level is maximum.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(8)JA

Parameters were added to support the 5-GHz access point radio.

12.2(11)JA

Parameters were added to support the 5.8-GHz bridge radio.

12.2(13)JA

Parameters were added to support the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz access point radio.

12.3(2)JA

Parameters were added to support the AIR-RM21A 5-GHz radio module.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to specify the local transmit power level for the current operating radio channel on the access point. This command requires the access point radio to be turned on. Lower power levels reduce the radio cell size and interference between cells. The maximum transmit power for the access point is limited by the regulatory domain for your country of operation.

On some access point radios, the available transmit power settings vary on a per-channel basis. Prior to using the power local command, you should set the access point to the desired radio channel. If the access point is set to scan for the best channel, then the power settings available in the power local command are limited by the radio channel selected by the access point. You can use the power local ? command to display the available power settings for that channel.

Examples

This example shows how to specify a 20-mW transmit power level for the 802.11b access point radio:

AP(config-if)# power local 20
 

This example shows how to reset power to defaults on one of the access point radios:

AP(config-if)# no power local

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

preamble-short

Use the preamble-short configuration interface command to enable short radio preambles. The radio preamble is a selection of data at the head of a packet that contains information that the access point and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. Use the no form of the command to change back to default values.

[no] preamble-short


Note This command is not supported on the 5-GHz access point radio interface (dot11radio1).


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The default is short radio preamble.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If short radio preambles are enabled, clients may request either short or long preambles and the access point formats packets accordingly. Otherwise, clients are told to use long preambles.

Examples

This example shows how to set the radio packet to use a short preamble.

AP(config-if)# preamble-short
 

This example shows how to set the radio packet to use a long preamble.

AP(config-if)# no preamble-short

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

probe-response gratuitous

Gratuitous Probe Response (GPR) aids in conserving battery power in dual mode phones that support cellulcar and WLAN modes of operation. GPR is available on 5-GHz radios and is disabled by default. Use the probe-response gratuitous configuration interface command to define amount of time between GPRs and the daterate used to transmit the GPR.

Use the no form of the command to disable the GPR settings.

[no] probe-response gratuitous [period <Kms>] [speed <rate>

 
Syntax Description

period Kms

Specifies the amount of time between GPRs in Kilomicroseconds (Kms). Kms is a unit of measurement in software terms.
K = 1024, m = 10-6, and s = seconds, so Kms = 0.001024 seconds,
1.024 milliseconds, or 1024 microseconds (0 to 255 Kms). The period values are from 10 to 255. The default value is 10.

speed rate

Specifies the data rate (in Mbps) used to transmit the GPR. The speed values are 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 18.0, 24.0, 36.0, 48.0, 54.0. The default value is 6.0.

 
Defaults

The command is disabled by default. The default period is 10 and the default speed is 6.0.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a GPR period of 10 Kms at a speed of 18 Mbps:

AP# config terminal
AP# interface dot11radio 1
AP(config-if)# probe-response gratuitous period 30 speed 18.0
 

This example shows how to configure a GPR period of 200 Kms at the default speed.

AP(config-if)# probe-response gratuitous period 200
 

This example shows how to disable the GPR settings:

AP(config-if)# no probe-response gratuitous

radius local-server pac-generate

Use the radius local-server pac-generate global configuration command to generate a Protected Access Credential (PAC) for a client device on a local authenticator access point. The local authenticator automatically generates PACs for EAP-FAST clients that request them. However, you might need to generate a PAC manually for some client devices. When you enter the command, the local authenticator generates a PAC file and writes it to the network location that you specify. The user imports the PAC file into the client profile.

radius local-server pac-generate username filename [password password] [expire days]

 
Syntax Description

username

Specifies the client username for which the PAC is generated.

filename

Specifies the name for the PAC file. When you enter the PAC file name, enter the full path to which the local authenticator writes the PAC file.

password password

Specifies a password used in password protection for the PAC file.

expire days

Specifies the number of days until the PAC file expires and is no longer valid.

 
Defaults

This default password for a PAC file is test, and the default expiration time is 1 day.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

In this example, the local authenticator generates a PAC for the username joe, password-protects the file with the password bingo, sets the PAC to expire in 10 days, and writes the PAC file to the TFTP server at 10.0.0.5:

AP# radius local-server pac-generate joe tftp://10.0.0.5/joe.pac password bingo expiry 10
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

radius-server local

Configures an access point as a local or backup authenticator

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

user (local server configuration mode)

Adds a user to the list of users allowed to authenticate to the local authenticator

radius server

To configure the RADIUS server on the access point, use the radius server command in configuration mode.

radius server name

 
Syntax Description

name

RADIUS server name.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Configuration Mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 

radius-server local

Use the radius-server local global configuration command to enable the access point as a local or backup authenticator and to enter configuration mode for the local authenticator.

radius-server local


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the access point as a local or backup authenticator:

AP(config)# radius-server local
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

group (local server configuration mode)

Creates a user group on the local authenticator and enters user group configuration mode

nas (local server configuration mode)

Adds an access point to the list of NAS access points on the local authenticator

show radius local-server statistics

Displays statistics for a local authenticator access point

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

user (local server configuration mode)

Adds a user to the list of users allowed to authenticate to the local authenticator

routing dynamic

To configure routing protocols, use the routing dynamic command in BV1 interface mode.

routing dynamic

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

BVI interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the routing protocols:

AP(config-if)# routing dynamic

 

rts

Use the rts configuration interface command to set the Request-To-Send (RTS) threshold and the number of retries. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to defaults.

Access Points

[no] rts
{threshold 0-4000 | retries 1-128}

Bridges

[no] rts
{threshold 0-4000 | retries 1-128}

 
Syntax Description

threshold 0-4000
(0-4000 on bridges)

Specifies the packet size, in bytes, above which the access point or bridge negotiates an RTS/CTS before sending out the packet.

retries 1-128

Specifies the number of times the access point or bridge issues an RTS before stopping the attempt to send the packet over the radio.

 
Defaults

The default threshold is 2347 bytes for all access points and bridges.

The default number of retries is 32.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(11)JA

This command was modified to support bridges.

 
Usage Guidelines

On bridges set up in a point-to-point configuration, set the RTS threshold to 4000 on both the root and non-root bridges. If you have multiple bridges set up in a point-to-multipoint configuration, set the RTS threshold to 4000 on the root bridge and to 0 on the non-root bridges.

You have the option to change the rts threshold value on BR1310 and BR1410 bridges to any value in the range 0 to 4000. For the BR1310 and BR1410, it would be useful to set the rts threshold value in the range 2348 to 4000 if the packet concatenation feature is enabled and the maximum packet concatenation size is in the range 0 to 2348.

Examples

This example shows how to set the RTS threshold on a bridge to 4000 bytes:

bridge(config-if)# rts threshold 4000
 

This example shows how to set the RTS retries count to 3:

AP(config-if)# rts retries 3
 

This example shows how to reset the parameter to defaults:

AP(config-if)# no rts
 

rxsop-threshold

Use the rxsop-threshold command to add the value of the Receiver Start of Packet Detection Threshold (RX-SOP) threshold. This threshold determines the Wi-Fi signal level in dBm at which an AP radio demodulates and decodes a packet.

rxsop-threshold threshold-value

 
Syntax Description

threshold-value

Specifies the RX-SOP threshold value.

For example if you configure the rxsop-threshold as

AP (config-if)# cca-threshold 74

This sets the RX-SOP threshold to -74 dBm, which means that the radio will demodulate only incoming frames that are at or above -74 dBm. So, for example, a client whose transmissions reach the AP at -78 dBm will be unable to transmit to this AP.

The higher the RX-SOP level, the less sensitive the radio is and the smaller the receiver cell size will be. By reducing the cell size, we ensure that the clients are connected to the nearest access point using the highest possible data rates.

 
Defaults

By default RX-SOP is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Radio Interface mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

(15.3(3)JF4)

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to add value to the RX-SOP threshold in the radio interface configuration mode:
 
AP(config-if)#rxsop-threshold 74

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays the radio interface configuration and statistics

server-address (LBS configuration mode)

Use the server-address LBS configuration mode command to specify the IP address of your location server and the port number on the server to which LBS access points send UDP packets that contain positioning information.

server-address ip-address port port-number

 
Syntax Description

ip-address

Specifies the IP address of the location server on your network.

port-number

Specifies the port on the location server to which LBS access points send UDP packets that contain positioning information. Enter a port number from 1024 to 65535.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

LBS configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the IP address of your location server and a port on the server:

ap(dot11-lbs# server-address 10.91.107.19 port 1024
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

channel-match (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies that the LBS packet sent by an LBS tag must match the radio channel on which the access point receives the packet

dot11 lbs

Creates an LBS profile and enters LBS configuration mode

interface dot11 (LBS configuration mode)

Enables an LBS profile on a radio interface

method (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the location method used in an LBS profile

multicast address (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the multicast address that LBS tag devices use when they send LBS packets

packet-type (LBS configuration mode)

Specifies the LBS packet type accepted in an LBS profile

short-slot-time

Use the short-slot-time configuration interface command to enable short slot time on the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radio. Short slot time reduces the slot time from 20 microseconds to 9 microseconds, thereby increasing throughput. The access point uses short slot time only when all clients that are associated to the 802.11g radio can support short slot time.

short-slot-time


Note This command is supported only on 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radios.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Short slot time is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable short slot time:

AP(config-if)# short-slot-time
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

wlccp wds priority

Configures an access point as a candidate to provide wireless domain services (WDS)

show dot11 autoconfig status

To display the Dot11 L2TPv3 auto configuration status, use the show dot11 autoconfig status command.

show dot11 autoconfig status

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(3)JAB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the access point Mode button status:

AP# show dot11 autoconfig status

show boot mode-button

Use the show boot mode-button privileged EXEC command to display the access point mode button status.

show boot mode-button

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(7)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the access point Mode button status:

AP# show boot mode-button
on
ap#
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

boot mode-button

Enables or disables the access point mode button.

show controllers dot11radio

Use the show controllers dot11radio privileged EXEC command to display the radio controller status.

show controllers dot11radio interface-number

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number. The 2.4-GHz radio(b, g, or n) is radio 0. The 5-GHz(a or n) radio is radio 1.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.4(3g)JA & 12.3(8)JEB

Command modified to include the following DFS information:

  • Uniform spreading is required
  • DFS is enabled or not for the particular frequency
  • Channels not in the non-occupancy period due to radar detection

Examples

This example shows how to display the radio controller status for radio interface 0:

AP# show controllers dot11radio 0
 

A portion of the output of this command shows the active power levels by rate, as shown below:

1.0 to 11.0, 20 dBm, changed due to regulatory maximum
6.0 to m15., 17 dBm, changed due to regulatory maximum
m0.-4 to m15.-4, 14 dBm, changed due to regulatory maximum
 

-4 means 40-MHz wide band. A similar output, -4s means 40-MHz wide band with short guard interval turned on.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays configuration and status information for the radio interface

show dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Use the show dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache privileged EXEC command to display MAC addresses in the MAC authentication cache.

show dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache [address]

 
Syntax Description

address

Specifies a specific MAC address in the cache.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Clear MAC addresses from the MAC authentication cache.

dot11 activity-timeout

Enable MAC authentication caching.

show dot11 adjacent-ap

Use the show dot11 adjacent-ap privileged EXEC command to display the fast, secure roaming list of access points that are adjacent to this access point. The WDS access point builds the adjacent access point list based on data from client devices that support fast, secure roaming. This command works only when you configure your wireless LAN for fast, secure roaming and there are client devices on your wireless LAN that support fast, secure roaming.

show dot11 adjacent-ap


Note For this command to work, dot11network-map should be enabled



Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the adjacent access point list:

AP# show dot11 adjacent-ap
 

This example shows a list of adjacent access points:

 

Radio

Address

Channel

Age(Hours)

SSID

--------

-----------------------

------------

----------------

----------

0

0007.50d5.8759

1

1

tsunami

These are descriptions of the list columns:

  • Radio—the interface number to which the client is currently associated
  • Address—the MAC address of the adjacent access point from which the client device roamed
  • Channel—the radio channel used by the adjacent access point
  • Age (Hours)—the number of hours since a client roamed from the adjacent access point
  • SSID—the SSID the client used to associate to the adjacent access point

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 adjacent-ap age-timeout

Specifies the number of hours an inactive entry remains in the adjacent access point list

show dot11 associations

Use the show dot11 associations privileged EXEC command to display the radio association table, radio association statistics, or to selectively display association information about all repeaters, all clients, a specific client, or basic service clients.

show dot11 associations
[client | repeater | statistics | H.H.H | bss-only | all-client | cckm-statistics]


Note The show dot11 associationss command shows only the first 15 characters of the association table. To see the entire table use the show dot11 associations client command.,


 
Syntax Description

client

(Option) Displays all client devices associated with the access point

repeater

(Option) Displays all repeater devices associated with the access point

statistics

(Option) Displays access point association statistics for the radio interface

H.H.H (mac-address)

(Option) Displays details about the client device with the specified MAC address (in xxxx.xxxx.xxxx format)

bss-only

(Option) Displays only the basic service set clients that are directly associated with the access point

all-client

(Option) Displays the status of all clients associated with the access point

cckm-statistics

(Option) Displays fast, secure roaming (CCKM) latency statistics measured at the access point for client devices using CCKM

 
Defaults

When parameters are not specified, this command displays the complete radio association table.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The data retrieved depends on the state of the device. If the station/wireless client is associated, the following states are printed:

  • EAP-Assoc
  • MAC-Assoc
  • Assoc

If the station/wireless client is not associated, the actual states are printed:

  • Auth_notAssoc
  • Wait ReAuth
  • BLOCK
  • IAPP_get
  • AAA_Auth
  • AAA_ReAuth
  • Drv_Add_InProg

Examples

This example shows how to display the radio association table:

AP# show dot11 associations
 

This example shows how to display all client devices associated with the access point:

AP# show dot11 associations client
 

This example shows how to display access point radio statistics:

AP# show dot11 associations statistics

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear dot11 client

Deauthenticates a client with a specified MAC address

clear dot11 statistics

Resets the statistics for a specified radio interface or client device

dot11 extension aironet

Starts a link test between the access point and a client device

show dot11 bssid

Use the show dot11 bssid privileged EXEC command to display the relationship between SSIDs and BSSIDs or MAC addresses.

show dot11 bssid

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
DefaultsDefaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display a list of BSSIDs and SSIDs:

AP# show dot11 bssid
 

This example shows the command output:

AP1230#show dot11 bssid
Interface BSSID Guest SSID
Dot11Radio1 0011.2161.b7c0 Yes tsunami
Dot11Radio0 0005.9a3e.7c0f Yes WPA2-TLS-g
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 mbssid

Enables BSSIDs on all radio interfaces that support multiple BSSIDs

mbssid

Enables BSSIDs on a radio interface

mbssid (SSID configuration mode)

Specifies that a BSSID is included in beacons and specifies a DTIM period for the BSSID

show dot11 cac

Use the show dot11 cac command to display CAC information for a radio interface.

show dot11 cac [dot11radio number]


Note This command is not supported on repeaters.


 
Syntax Description

dot11radio number

Displays admission control statistics for the 802.11 radio interface, where number is 0 for the 802.11a and 802.11g radios or 1 for the 801.11a radio.

 
DefaultsDefaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display CAC information for the access point:

AP# show dot11 cac
Admission Control is allowed on the following SSID(s):
test
The AAC on Dot11Radio0 is 23437
Dot11Radio0, AC:3 :
Configuration: Max-Channel 75, Roam 10
Medium Time Info:
MT max: 23437, MT roam: 3125, MT Consumed: 0, Total MT Left: 23437
Direct Orig MT Left: 20312
Admitted Count 0, Rejected Count 0
Counters:
ssid rejects: 0, rate rejects: 0, tspec violations: 0
bandwidth rejects: 0, active calls: 0
Na_direct=12, Na_roam =14, Channel Used= 0, State = 0
Dot11Radio0, AC:2 :
ACM bit is turned off, all TSPECS accepted
Counters:
ssid rejects: 0, rate rejects: 0, tspec violations: 0 The AAC on Dot11Radio1is 10937
Dot11Radio1, AC:3 :
Configuration: Max-Channel 35, Roam 5
Medium Time Info:
MT max: 10937, MT roam: 1562, MT Consumed: 0, Total MT Left: 10937
Direct Orig MT Left: 9375
Admitted Count 0, Rejected Count 0
Counters:
ssid rejects: 0, rate rejects: 0, tspec violations: 0
bandwidth rejects: 0, active calls: 0
Na_direct=5, Na_roam =6, Channel Used= 0, State = 0
bandwidth rejects: 0, active calls: 0
Na_direct=0, Na_roam =0, Channel Used= 0, State = 2

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Configures CAC admission control on the access point.

traffic-stream

Configures CAC traffic data rates and priorities on the access point.

debug cac

Provides debug information for CAC admission control on the access point.

show dot11 carrier busy

Use the show dot11 carrier busy privileged EXEC command to display recent carrier busy test results. You can display test results once using this command. After the display, you must use the dot11 carrier busy command to run the carrier busy test again.

show dot11 carrier busy

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
DefaultsDefaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the carrier busy test results:

AP# show dot11 carrier busy
 

This example shows the carrier busy test results:

Frequency Carrier Busy %
--------- --------------
5180 0
5200 2
5220 27
5240 5
5260 1
5280 0
5300 3
5320 2
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 carrier busy

Runs the carrier busy test

show dot11 directed-roam

Use the show dot11 directed-roam privileged EXEC command to display recent carrier busy test results. You can display test results once using this command. After the display, you must use the dot11 directed-roam command to run the carrier busy test again.

show dot11 directed-roam [clients] [aps]

 
Syntax Description

clients

Displays the canidate client list.

aps

Displays the canidate access point list.

 
DefaultsDefaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the carrier busy test results:

AP# show dot11 carrier busy
 

This example shows the carrier busy test results:

Frequency Carrier Busy %
--------- --------------
5180 0
5200 2
5220 27
5240 5
5260 1
5280 0
5300 3
5320 2
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 carrier busy

Runs the carrier busy test

show dot11 ids eap

Use the show dot11 ids eap privileged EXEC command to display wireless IDS statistics.

show dot11 ids eap

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
DefaultsDefaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command displays wireless IDS information only if you first enable IDS on a scanner access point in monitor mode.

Examples

This example shows how to display wireless IDS statistics:

AP# show dot11 ids eap

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 ids eap attempts

Configures limits on authentication attempts and EAPOL flooding on scanner access points in monitor mode

show dot11 ids mfp

Use the show dot11 ids mfp privileged EXEC command to display to Management Frame Protection (MFP) parameters on the access point.

show dot11 ids mfp
detector [statistics]
distributor {detectors |generators | statistics}
generator
client statistics

show dot11 ids mfp io

detector

Indicates if the MFP detector is configured on the access point.

detector statistics

Displays the MFP statistics for the access point.

distributor detectors

Displays the MFP distributed detectors.

distributor generators

Displays the MFP distributed generators.

distributor statistics

Displays the MFP receive statistics on the access point.

generator

Displays the MFP generator.

io

Displays the MFP IO statistics.

client statistics

Displays the MFP-2 statistics on the access point.

 
Defaults

There are no defaults for this command.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the MFP detectors configured on the access point:

ap(config)# show dot11 lds mfp detector
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 ids mfp

Configures the MFP parameters on the access point.

debug dot11 ids mfp

Debugs MFP operations on the access point.

show dot11 neighbor-ap

To display the neighbour access point, use the show dot11 neighbor-ap command in privileged EXEC mode.

show dot11 neighbor-ap

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
DefaultsDefaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the radio network map:

ap# show dot11 neighbor-ap

show dot11 network-map

Use the show dot11 network-map privileged EXEC command to display the radio network map. The radio network map contains information from Cisco access points in the same Layer 2 domain as this access point.

show dot11network-map

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
DefaultsDefaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command displays network map information only if you first enable the network map feature with the dot11 network map command.

Examples

This example shows how to display the radio network map:

AP# show dot11 network-map

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 network-map

Enables the network map feature

show dot11 statistics client-traffic

Use the show dot 11 statistics client-traffic privileged EXEC command to display the radio client traffic statistics.

show dot11 statistics client-traffic

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the radio client traffic statistics:

AP# show dot11 statistics client-traffic

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear dot11 client

Deauthenticates a client with a specified MAC address

clear dot11 statistics

Resets the statistics for a specified radio interface or client device

show dot11 traffic-streams

Use the show dot11 traffic streams command to display a list of traffic streams admitted by the AP. It lists the access category and TSID of the streams as well as medium time allocated for the traffic stream.

show dot11 traffic-streams

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

show dot11 traffic-streams
Following are the Admitted TS on this AP:
OrigSTA OrigMethod TSID AC MT
----------- ---------- ---- -- --
000a.f4bc.8de8 ADDTS 01 3 559
000a.f4bc.8de8 ASSOC 03 2 10
000a.fdea.beef ADDTS 02 3 1554

show dot11 vlan-name

Use the show dot11 vlan-name privileged EXEC command to display VLAN name and ID pairs configured on the access point. If your access point is not configured with VLAN names or is configured only with VLAN IDs, there is no output for this command.

show dot11 vlan-name [vlan-name]

 
Syntax Description

vlan-name

(Optional) Displays the VLAN name and VLAN ID for a specific VLAN name

 
Defaults

When you do not specify a VLAN name, this command displays all VLAN name and ID pairs configured on the access point.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display all VLAN name and ID pairs on an access point:

AP# show dot11 vlan-name
 

This example shows how to display the VLAN name and ID for a specific VLAN name:

AP# show dot11 vlan-name chicago
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 vlan-name

Assigns a VLAN name to a VLAN.

show dot1x

Use the show dot1x command to display dot1x information on the access point.

show dot1x [all |
interface {dot11radio number | fastethernet number} [details | statistics] |
statistics

 
Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Displays all DOT1X information on the access point.

interface

(Optional) Displays DOT1x information specific to an interface.

dot11radio number

(Optional) Specifies the radio interface, where number is 0 for the 802.11b or 802.11g radios and 1 for the 802.11a radio.

fastethernet number

(Optional) Specifies the fast Ethernet interface, where number is 0.

details

(Optional) Displays DOT1x details for the interface.

statistics

(Optional) Displays DOT1x message statistics for the interface or the access point.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display all DOT1x information on an access point:

AP# show dot1x all
 
Sysauthcontrol Disabled
Dot1x Protocol Version 2
 
Dot1x Info for FastEthernet0
-----------------------------------
PAE = SUPPLICANT
StartPeriod = 30
AuthPeriod = 30
HeldPeriod = 60
MaxStart = 3
Credentials profile = cred-switch-eap
EAP profile = switch-tls
maldives-ap#
 

This example shows how to display all theDOT1x statistics:

AP# show dot1x statistics
Dot1x Supplicant Port Statistics for FastEthernet0
--------------------------------------------
RxReq = 8 RxInvalid = 0 RxLenErr = 0 RxTotal = 10
 
TxStart = 1 TxLogoff = 0 TxResp = 7 TxTotal = 8
 
RxVersion = 1 LastRxSrcMAC = 000f.f77f.9f87
 

This example shows how to display the fast Ethernet interface statistics:

AP# show dot1x interface fastethernet 0 statistics
Dot1x Supplicant Port Statistics for FastEthernet0
--------------------------------------------
RxReq = 0 RxInvalid = 0 RxLenErr = 0 RxTotal = 0
 
TxStart = 3 TxLogoff = 0 TxResp = 0 TxTotal = 3
 
RxVersion = 0 LastRxSrcMAC = 0000.0000.0000
 

This example shows how to display the fast Ethernet interface details:

AP# show dot1x interface fastethernet 0 details
Dot1x Info for FastEthernet0
-----------------------------------
PAE = SUPPLICANT
StartPeriod = 30
AuthPeriod = 30
HeldPeriod = 60
MaxStart = 3
 
Dot1x Supplicant Client List Empty

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

eap profile

Configures an EAP profile.

method (eap profile configuration mode)

Specifies the method types for an EAP profile.

show eap regisgtrations

Displays EAP registrations for the access point.

show eap sessions

Displays EAP statistics for the access point.

show dot1x credentials

Use the show dot1x credentials EXEC mode command to display the dot1x credentials configured on the access point.

show dot1x credentials

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the dot1x credentials on the access point:

AP# show dot1x credentials
Credential Name Username AnonID PKI-Trustpoint Hidden
test John101 ZX101a PKI-Tpoint N
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x credentials

Configures dot1x credentials on the access point.

show eap registrations

Use the show eap registrations privileged EXEC command to display the EAP registrations configured on the access point.

show eap registrations [method [name] | transport [name]

 
Syntax Description

method name

Displays current registered EAP methods. The option name specifices an individual method name.

transport name

Displays the registered EAP transport registrations. The option name specifices an individual transport name.

 
Defaults

There are no defaults for this command.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example displays typical EAP registrations on an access point:

AP# show eap registrations
Registered EAP Methods:
Method Type Name
4 Peer MD5
6 Peer GTC
13 Peer TLS
17 Peer LEAP
26 Peer MSCHAPV2
43 Peer FAST
 
Registered EAP Lower Layers:
Handle Type Name
3 Peer Dot1x-Supplicant
2 Peer AP-WDS Auth Layer
1 Peer EAP-FAST
 

This example displays typical EAP transport registrations on an access point:

AP# show eap registrations transport
Registered EAP Lower Layers:
Handle Type Name
3 Peer Dot1x-Supplicant
2 Peer AP-WDS Auth Layer
1 Peer EAP-FAST
 

This example displays typical EAP-FAST transport details on an access point:

AP#show eap registrations transport EAP-FAST
Configuration details for lower layer: 'EAP-FAST'
Peer Config:
Credentials profile: None
EAP profile name: None
Idle timer: 60s
Retransmit timer: 30s
Maximum retrans: 2
Auth Config: None
Encap bytes: 0
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

eap profile

Configures an EAP profile.

dot1x eap profile

Configures an EAP profile for an interface.

show eap sessions

Displays EAP session information on the access point.

show eap sessions

Use the show eap sessions privileged EXEC command to display the EAP sessions on the access point.

show eap sessions [credentials <name>] [interface <name>] [method <name>]
[transport <name>]

 
Syntax Description

credentials <name>

Displays EAP session credentials on the access point. The name option specifies a credential profile name.

interface <name>

Displays EAP session information for a specific interface. The name option specifies an interface name.

method <name>

Displays EAP method information for the access point. The name option specifies a method name.

transport <name>

Displays EAP transport information for the access point. The name option specifies a transport name.

 
Defaults

There are no defaults for this command.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display EAP session information:

AP# show eap sessions
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x eap profile

Configures an EAP profile for an interface.

eap profile

Configures an EAP profile.

method (eap profile configuration mode)

Specifies the method types for an EAP profile.

show eap registrations

Displays EAP registrations on the access point.

show environment

Use the show environment EXEC command to display information about the internal temperature of the bridge radio.

show environment


Note This command is supported only on bridges. It measures and displays the internal temperature of the unit and should not be confused with the external temperature limits for the device.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display temperature information for the bridge radio:

bridge# show environment
Environmental Statistics
Environmental status as of 00:10:45 UTC Thu Mar 27 2003
Data is 3 second(s) old, refresh in 57 second(s)
 
Dot11Radio0 temperature measured at 37(C)
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

snmp-server enable traps envmon temperature

Enable an SNMP trap to announce near-out-of-range bridge radio temperature.

show iapp rogue-ap-list

Use the show iapp rogue-ap-list privileged EXEC command to display a list of rogue access points.

show iapp rogue-ap-list


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The list contains an entry for each access point that a client station reported as a possible rogue access point. Each list entry contains the following information:

Rogue AP —MAC address of the reported rogue access point

Count —The number of times the access point was reported

Last Rpt Src —The MAC address of the last client to report the rogue access point

R —The last reason code

Prev Rpt Src —The MAC address of any previous client that reported the rogue access point

R —The previous reason code

Last(Min) —The number of minutes since the last report

1st(Min) —The number of minutes since the access point was first reported as a possible rogue

Name —The name of a Cisco rogue access point

The following reason codes are displayed:

1 —The rogue was not running 802.1x

2 —Authentication with the rogue timed out

3 —Bad user password

4 —Authentication challenge failed

Examples

This example shows how to display the list of IAPP rogue access points:

AP# show iapp rogue-ap-list

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear iapp rogue-ap-list

Clears the rogue access point list

show iapp standby-parms

Use the show iapp standby-parms privileged EXEC command to display IAPP standby parameters when a standby MAC address is configured. The information displayed includes the standby MAC address, the time-out value, and the poll-frequency value.

show iapp standby-parms


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the IAPP standby parameters:

AP# show iapp standby-parms

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

logging buffered

Configures an access point with a specified MAC address as the standby

iapp standby poll-frequency

Configures the standby access point polling interval

iapp standby timeout

Configures the standby access point polling time-out value

show iapp statistics

Use the show iapp statistics privileged EXEC command to display the IAPP transmit and receive statistics.

show iapp statistics

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command displays IAPP transmit and receive packet counts and IAPP error counts. The operating mode for the access point is also displayed.

Examples

This example shows how to display the IAPP statistics:

AP# show iapp statistics

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear iapp statistics

Clears the IAPP transmit and receive statistics

show interfaces dot11radio

Use the show interfaces dot11radio privileged EXEC command to display the radio interface configuration and statistics.

show interfaces dot11radio interface-number

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number. The 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0. The 5-GHz radio is radio 1.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the radio interface configuration and statistics:

AP# show interfaces dot11radio 0

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

interface dot11radio

Configures a specified radio interface

show running-config

Displays the access point run time configuration information

show interfaces dot11radio aaa

Use the show interfaces dot11radio aaa privileged EXEC command to display the radio interface information.

show interfaces dot11radio interface-number
aaa [timeout]

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number. The 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0. The 5-GHz radio is radio 1.

timeout

Displays the AAA timeout value.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display AAA information for interface 0:

AP# show interfaces dot11radio 0 aaa

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

debug dot11 aaa

Debug radio AAA operations

show dot11 associations

Displays radio association information

show interfaces dot11radio statistics

Use the show interfaces dot11radio statistics privileged EXEC command to display the radio interface statistics.

show interfaces dot11radio interface-number statistics

 
Syntax Description

interface-number

Specifies the radio interface number. The 2.4-GHz radio is radio 0. The 5-GHz radio is radio 1.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the radio interface statistics for interface 0:

AP# show interfaces dot11radio 0 statistics

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear dot11 statistics

Resets the statistics for a specified radio interface

interface dot11radio

Configures a specified radio interface

show running-config

Displays the access point run time configuration information

show interfaces dot11radio

Displays configuration and statistics for a specified radio interface

show ip igmp snooping groups

Use the show ip igmp snooping groups privileged EXEC command to display IGMP snooping status information.

show ip igmp snooping groups
[count] [network-id network id]
[vlan vlan id [group address] [count] ]

 
Syntax Description

count

Displays group count information.

network-id network-id

Displays group information by wireless Network ID.

vlan vlan id

Displays group information by VLAN.

group address

Displays group information for the specified VLAN.

count

Displays the nunber of groups in the VLAN.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the numbrer of IGMP snooping groups configured on the access point:

AP# show ip igmp snooping groups count
Total number of groups: 0
 

This example shows how to display IGMP snooping group information by vlan:

AP# show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 1
 

This example shows how to display the number of IGMP snooping group in a vlan:

AP# show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 1 count
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show ip igmp snooping groups

Displays IGMP snooping group information.

ip igmp snooping vlan

Enables IGMP snooping for a Catalyst VLAN.

show l2tp tunnel packets

To display the L2TP counters and statistics, use the show l2tp tunnel packets command.

show l2tp tunnel packets

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(3)JAB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the L2TP counters and statistics:

AP# show l2tp tunnel packets

show led flash

To display the LED flashing status, use the show led flashcommand.

show led flash

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the LED flashing status:

AP# show led flash

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

led flash

Enables or disables LED flashing

show power-injector

Use the show power-injector privileged EXEC command to view link statistics and the current operating mode for the two physical Ethernet ports (port 0 and port 1) of a Cisco Aironet power-injector.

show power-injector

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The power injector provides power over Ethernet (PoE) to the access point or bridge.

Port 0 connects to the access point or bridge and port 1 connects to the network switch or router.

The following information is available for each of the two power-injector ports:

  • port descriptors (port number, port speed, operating mode:auto, full or half duplex)
  • total transmitted and received unicast, broadcast, and multicast packets
  • transmit and receive error statistics including collisions, undersized packets and oversized packets

Note This command is supported on Cisco Aironet 1300 and 1400 series access points.


Examples

The following example shows a possible display for show power-injector.

  • Both ports are operating at full duplex
  • Ports 0 and 1 links are up.

Note Only ports 0 and 1 are used in the power-injector. Ports 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 are not used and will always display as down or disabled.



Note The Ethernet port of the access point or bridge and the Ethernet port of the network switch or router that connect to the power-injector should be set to auto-negotiation. This will prevent an operating mismatch between the power injector, access point and network switch or router.


show power-injector
=========== Power Injector Statistics ===============
Power Injector port 0 speed 100Mb/s duplex full link up enable yes
tx bytes 194053 tx drops 0 tx bcasts 191 tx mcasts 1200
tx unicasts 0 tx collisions 0 tx single collisions 0 tx multiples collisions 0
tx deferred 0 tx late collisions 0 tx excessive collisions 0 tx frame disc 0
tx pauses 0
rx bytes 14356 rx undersizes 0 rx pauses 0 rx (<=64 bytes) pkts 105
rx (<=127 bytes) pkts 7 rx (<=255 bytes) pkts 0 rx (<=511 bytes) pkts 18 rx (<=1023 bytes)
pkts 0
rx oversize 0 rx jabbers 0 rx align errs 0 rx fcs errs 0
rx good bytes 14356 rx drops 0 rx unicasts 98 rx mcasts 19
rx bcasts 13 rx SA chngs 9 rx frags 0 rx excessive sizes 0
rx symbol errs 0
Power Injector port 1 speed 100Mb/s duplex full link up enable yes
tx bytes 8084 tx drops 0 tx bcasts 13 tx mcasts 19
tx unicasts 0 tx collisions 0 tx single collisions 0 tx multiples collisions 0
tx deferred 0 tx late collisions 0 tx excessive collisions 0 tx frame disc 0
tx pauses 0
rx bytes 64473 rx undersizes 0 rx pauses 0 rx (<=64 bytes) pkts 533
rx (<=127 bytes) pkts 165 rx (<=255 bytes) pkts 12 rx (<=511 bytes) pkts 41 rx (<=1023
bytes) pkts 0
rx oversize 0 rx jabbers 0 rx align errs 0 rx fcs errs 0
rx good bytes 64473 rx drops 0 rx unicasts 0 rx mcasts 557
rx bcasts 194 rx SA chngs 141 rx frags 0 rx excessive sizes 0
rx symbol errs 0
Power Injector port 2 link down
Power Injector port 3 link down
Power Injector port 4 link down
Power Injector port 5 is disabled
Power Injector port 6 is disabled

 
Related Commands

 

Command
Description

show power-injector clear

Resets (clears) the statistics on the power-injector ports 0 and 1.

show radius local-server statistics

Use the show radius local-server statistics privileged EXEC command to view statistics collected by the local authenticator.

show radius local-server statistics

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display statistics from the local authenticator:

ap# show radius local-server statistics
 

This example shows local server statistics:

ap# show radius local-server statistics
Successes : 0 Unknown usernames : 0
Client blocks : 0 Invalid passwords : 0
Unknown NAS : 0 Invalid packet from NAS: 0
 
NAS : 10.91.6.158
Successes : 0 Unknown usernames : 0
Client blocks : 0 Invalid passwords : 0
Corrupted packet : 0 Unknown RADIUS message : 0
No username attribute : 0 Missing auth attribute : 0
Shared key mismatch : 0 Invalid state attribute: 0
Unknown EAP message : 0 Unknown EAP auth type : 0
PAC refresh : 0 Invalid PAC received : 0
 
Username Successes Failures Blocks
janee 0 0 0
jazke 0 0 0
jsmith 0 0 0
 

The first section of statistics lists cumulative statistics from the local authenticator.

The second section lists statistics for each access point (NAS) authorized to use the local authenticator. The EAP-FAST statistics in this section include the following:

  • Auto provision success—the number of PACs generated automatically
  • Auto provision failure—the number of PACs not generated because of an invalid handshake packet or invalid username or password
  • PAC refresh—the number of PACs renewed by clients
  • Invalid PAC received—the number of PACs received that were expired, that the authenticator could not decrypt, or that were assigned to a client username not in the authenticator’s database

The third section lists stats for individual users. If a user is blocked and the lockout time is set to infinite, blocked appears at the end of the stat line for that user. If the lockout time is not infinite, Unblocked in x seconds appears at the end of the stat line for that user.

Use this privileged exec mode command to reset local authenticator statistics to zero:

AP# clear radius local-server statistics
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

radius-server local

Configures the access point as a local or backup authenticator

show running-config ssid

Use the show running-config ssid privileged EXEC command to view configuration details for SSIDs that are configured globally.

show running-config ssid ssid

 
Syntax Description

ssid

Displays configuration details for a specific SSID.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 ssid

Creates an SSID in global configuration mode

ssid

Creates an SSID for a specific radio interface or assigns a globally configured SSID to a specific interface

show spanning-tree

Use the show spanning-tree privileged EXEC command to display information about the spanning tree topology.

show spanning-tree
{group | active | blockedports | bridge | brief | inconsistentports | interface interface | root | summary}

 
Syntax Description

group

Specifies a bridge group from 1 to 255

active

Displays information only on interfaces in the active state

blockedports

Lists blocked ports

bridge

Displays status and information for this bridge

brief

Displays a brief summary of interface information

inconsistentports

Lists inconsistent ports

interface interface

Displays information for a specific interface

root

Displays status and configuration information for the spanning tree root

summary

Displays a summary of port states

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display STP information for bridge group 1:

bridge# show spanning-tree 1
 

This example shows how to display STP information for the bridge’s radio interface:

bridge# show spanning-tree interface dot11radio0
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

bridge protocol ieee

Enables STP on the bridge

show specrum recover | status

To display information about the spectrum mode, use the show spectrum command in privileged EXEC mode.

show spectrum recover | status

 
Syntax Description

recover

Displays information about the spectrum FW count

status

Displays information about the spectrum FW status

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JA

This command was introduced.

show wlccp

Use the show wlccp privileged EXEC command to display information on devices participating in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM).

Use the show wlccp privileged EXEC command to display information on devices participating in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM).

show wlccp
ap [rm [context | accumulation]] |
wnm status |
wds [ap [detail | mac-address mac-address [mn-list]]] |
[mn [detail | mac-address mac-address]] | [statistics] | [nm] |
[aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache]


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

ap [rm [context | accumulation ]]

(Optional) When you enter this option on an access point participating in CCKM, this option displays the MAC address and IP address of the access point providing wireless domain services (WDS), the access point’s state (authenticating, authenticated, or registered), the IP address of the infrastructure authenticator, and the IP address of the client device (MN) authenticator.

  • rm—Use this option to display information on radio measurement contexts or the radio measurement accumulation state.

wnm status

(Optional) This command displays the IP address of the wireless network manager (WNM) and the status of the authentication between the WNM and the WDS access point. Possible statuses include not authenticated, auth in progress, authentication fail, authenticated, and security keys setup.

wds [ap [detail | mac-address mac-address [mn-list]]] |
[mn [detail | mac-address mac-address]] |
[statistics] |
[nm] |
[aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache]

(Optional) When you enter this option on the access point providing WDS, this option displays cached information about participating access points and client devices.

  • ap—Use this option to display information about access points participating in CCKM. The command displays each access point’s MAC address, IP address, state (authenticating, authenticated, or registered), and lifetime (seconds remaining before the access point must reauthenticate). Use the mac-addr sub-option to display information about a specific access point. Use the mn-list sub-option to display all the mobile nodes registered through the access point.
  • mn—Use this option to display cached information about client devices, also called mobile nodes. The command displays each client’s MAC address, IP address, the access point to which the client is associated (cur-AP), and state (authenticating, authenticated, or registered). Use the detail option to display the client’s lifetime (seconds remaining before the client must send a refreshed registration), SSID, and VLAN ID. Use the mac-address option to display information about a specific client device.
  • statistics—Use this option to display statistics about devices participating in WDS and CCKM.
  • aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache—Use this option to display MAC addresses in the MAC authentication cache.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(13)JA

This command was modified to include radio measurement options.

Examples

This example shows the command you enter on the access point providing WDS to list all client devices (mobile nodes) participating in CCKM:

AP# show wlccp wds mn
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear wlccp wds

Resets WDS statistics and removes devices from the WDS database

show dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Displays MAC addresses in the MAC authentication cache

wlccp wds priority

Configures an access point as a candidate to provide wireless domain services (WDS)

show wlccp ap mn

Use the show wlccp ap mn privileged EXEC command to display information on a mobile node.

show wlccp ap [mn mac address]


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

mac address

Specifies the MAC address of the mobile node.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows the command you enter on the access point providing WDS to display information on the mobile nodes:

AP# show wlccp ap mn
MN Mac Address MN IP Address VLAN Wireless Network-ID
-------------- --------------- --------------- -------------------
123a.8a7d.1234 65.103.0.129 702(dynamic) 103 (Radius Assigned)
123a.8a6d.1236 65.101.0.129 100 101(Static)
 

This example shows the command you enter on the access point providing WDS to display information on the specified mobile node:

AP# show wlccp ap mn 123a.8a7d.1234
MN Mac Address MN IP Address VLAN Wireless Network-ID
-------------- --------------- --------------- -------------------
123a.8a7d.1234 65.103.0.129 702(dynamic) 103 (Radius Assigned)

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show dot11 associations

Displays the radio association table, radio association statistics, or selectively display association information about all repeaters, all clients, a specific client, or basic service clients.

show wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor-list

Use the show wlccp ap enhanced-neighbor-list privileged EXEC command to display the enhanced neighbor list. The enhanced neighbor list feature is enabled on specific access points from the Cisco WLSE.

show wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor list


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows the command you enter on the access point providing WDS to display information on the mobile nodes:

AP# show wlccp ap enhanced-neighbor-list
Ehnanced Neighbor List: Enabled
 
Neighbor APs List
--------------------]

 

AP

BSSID

Channel

Band

Phy-Type

Tx-power

Min-rssi

Hysteresis

Scan-threshold

Trans-time

1

0000.0123.0801

6

1

1

5

50

5

65

60

2

0000.0123.0802

11

2

2

10

50

5

65

60

3

0000.0123.0803

56

3

1

20

50

5

65

60

4

0000.0123.0804

100

4

1

30

50

5

65

60

5

0000.0123.0805

48

5

1

50

50

5

65

60

 
Related Commands5 0000.0f47.080e 48 5 1 50 50 5 65 60

Command
Description

debug wlccp ap rm enhanced-neighbor-list

Displays internal debugging and error messages of the Enhanced Neighbor List feature.

show debugging

Displays all debug settings and the debug packet headers

show wlccp

Displays WLCCP information

snmp-server enable traps

To enable all Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notification types that are available on your system, use the snmp-server enable traps command in global configuration mode. To disable all available SNMP notifications, use the no form of this command.

snmp-server enable traps [notification-type]

no snmp-server enable traps [notification-type]

 
Syntax Description

notification type

(Optional) Type of notification (trap) to enable or disable. If no type is specified, all notifications available on your device are enabled or disabled (if the no form is used). The notification type can be one of the following keywords:

authenticate-fail

(Optional) Enables the SNMP 802.11 authentication fail trap.

deauthenticate

(Optional) Enables the SNMP 802.11 deathentication trap.

disassociate

(Optional) Enables the SNMP 802.11 disassociate trap.

dot11-mibs

(Optional) Enables all SNMP DOT 11 traps.

dot11-qos

(Optional) Enables the SNMP 802.11 QoS change trap.

rogue-ap

(Optional) Enables the SNMP 802.11 rogue access point trap.

switch-over

(Optional Enables the SNMP 802.11 standby switchover trap.

wlan-wep

(Optional) Enables the SNMP 802.11 wireless LAN WEP trap.

 
Command Default

This command is disabled by default. Most notification types are disabled. However, some notification types cannot be controlled with this command.

If you enter this command with no notification-type keyword extenstions, the default is to enable (or disable, if the no form is used) all notification types controlled by this command..

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

Examples

This example shows how to enable the SNMP 802.11 deathenticate trap:

AP(config)# snmp-server enable traps deathenticate
 

This example shows how to enable all available SNMP 802.11 traps:

AP(config)# snmp-server enable dot11-mibs

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.0 (1)T

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

For additional notification types, see the Related Commands table for this command.

SNMP notifications can be sent as traps or inform requests. This command enables both traps and inform requests for the specified notification types. To specify whether the notifications should be sent as traps or informs, use the snmp-server host [traps | informs] command.

If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure the router to send these SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all notification types are enabled. If you enter the command with a keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled. In order to enable multiple types of notifications, you must issue a separate snmp-server enable traps command for each notification type and notification option.

The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications. In order to send notifications, you must configure at least one snmp-server host command

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show environment

Displays current temperature of the the radio in a wireless bridge

snmp-server enable traps envmon temperature

Use the snmp-server enable traps envmon temperature global configuration command to enable an SNMP trap for monitoring bridge radio temperature. This trap is sent out when the bridge radio temperature approaches the limits of its operating range (55° C to –33° C; 131° F to –27.4° F).

snmp-server enable traps envmon temperature


Note This command is supported only on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the envmon temperature trap:

bridge# snmp-server enable traps envmon temperature

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show environment

Displays current temperature of the bridge radio

snmp-server group

To configure a new SNMP group, or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views, use the snmp-server group global configuration command. To remove a specified SNMP group, use the no form of this command.

[no] snmp-server group [groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}}] [read readview]
[write writeview] [notify notifyview] [access access-list]

 
Syntax Description

groupname

(Optional) Specifies the name of the group.

v1

(Optional) The least secure of the possible security models.

v2c

(Optional) The second-least secure of the possible security models. It allows for the transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers twice the width of what is normally allowed.

v3

(Optional) The most secure of the possible security models.

auth

(Optional) Specifies authentication of a packet without encrypting it.

noauth

(Optional) Specifies no authentication of a packet.

priv

(Optional) Specifies authentication of a packet with encryption.

read

(Optional) The option that allows you to specify a read view.

readview

(Optional) A string (not to exceed 64 characters) that is the name of the view that enables a user only to view the contents of the agent.

write

(Optional) The option that allows you to specify a write view.

writeview

(Optional) A string (not to exceed 64 characters) that is the name of the view that enables a user to enter data and configure the contents of the agent.

notify

(Optional) The option that allows you to specify a notify view.

notifyview

(Optional) A string (not to exceed 64 characters) that is the name of the view that enables you to specify a notify, inform, or trap.

access

(Optional) The option that allows you to specify an access list.

access-list

(Optional) A string (not to exceed 64 characters) that is the name of the access list.

 
Defaults

Table 2-13 lists the default settings for the SNMP views:

Table 2-13 Default View Settings

Setting
Description

readview

Assumed to be every object belonging to the Internet (1.3.6.1) OID space, unless the user uses the read option to override this state.

writeview

Nothing is defined for the write view (that is, the null OID). You must configure write access.

notifyview

Nothing is defined for the notify view (that is, the null OID). If a view is specified, any notifications in that view that are generated will be sent to all users associated with the group (provided an SNMP server host configuration exists for the user).

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When a community string is configured internally, two groups with the name public are autogenerated, one for the v1 security model and the other for the v2c security model. Similarly, deleting a community string will delete a v1 group with the name public and a v2c group with the name public.

Configuring Notify Views

Although the notifyview option allows you to specify a notify view when configuring an SNMP group, Cisco recommends that you avoid specifying a notify view for these reasons:

  • The snmp-server host command autogenerates a notify view for the user and adds it to the group associated with that user.
  • Modifying the group’s notify view affects all users associated with that group.

The notifyview option is available for two reasons:

  • If a group has a notify view that is set using SNMP, you might need to change the notify view.
  • The snmp-server host command might have been configured before the snmp-server group command. In this case, you must either reconfigure the snmp-server host command or specify the appropriate notify view.

Instead of specifying the notify view for a group as part of the snmp-server group command, use the following commands in global configuration mode:

 

Step
Command
Purpose

Step 1

snmp-server user

Configures an SNMP user.

Step 2

snmp-server group

Configures an SNMP group without adding a notify view.

Step 3

snmp-server host

Autogenerates the notify view by specifying the recipient of a trap operation.

Working with Passwords and Digests

No default values exist for authentication or privacy algorithms when you configure the command. Also, no default passwords exist. The minimum length for a password is one character, although Cisco recommends using eight characters for security. If you forget a password, you cannot recover it and will need to reconfigure the user. You can specify either a plain-text password or a localized MD5 digest.

The following example shows how to enter a plain-text password for the string arizona2 for user John in group Johngroup, type the following command line:

snmp-server user John Johngroup v3 auth md5 arizona2
 

When you enter a show running-config command, you will not see a line for this user. To see if this user has been added to the configuration, type the show snmp user command.

If you have the localized MD5 or SHA digest, you can specify that string instead of the plain-text password. The digest should be formatted as aa:bb:cc:dd where aa, bb, and cc are hex values. Also, the digest should be exactly 16 octets long.

The following example shows how to specify the command with a digest name of 00:11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88:99:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF:

snmp-server user John Johngroup v3 encrypted auth md5
00:11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88:99:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

snmp-server user

Configures a new user for an SNMP group

snmp-server view

Creates or modifies an SNMP view entry

snmp-server location

Use the snmp-server location global configuration command to specify the SNMP system location and the location-name attribute recommended by the Wi-Fi Alliance’s guidelines for Wireless Internet Service Provider roaming (WISPr).

snmp-server location location

 
Syntax Description

location

Specifies the SNMP system location and the WISPr location-name attribute

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

The WISPr Best Current Practices for Wireless Internet Service Provider (WISP) Roaming document recommends that you enter the location name in this format:

hotspot_operator_name,location

This example shows how to configure the SNMP system location and the WISPr location-name attribute:

ap# snmp-server location ACMEWISP,Gate_14_Terminal_C_of_Newark_Airport
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot11 location isocc

Specifies ISO and ITU country and area codes that the access point includes in accounting and authentication requests

snmp-server user

To configure a new user to an SNMP group, use the snmp-server user global configuration command. To remove a user from an SNMP group, use the no form of the command.

[no] snmp-server user username [groupname remote ip-address [udp-port port]
{v1 | v2c | v3}[encrypted][auth {md5 | sha} auth-password [priv des56 priv password]] [access access-list]

 
Syntax Description

username

The name of the user on the host that connects to the agent.

groupname

(Optional) The name of the group to which the user is associated.

remote

(Optional) Specifies the remote copy of SNMP on the router.

ip-address

(Optional) The IP address of the device that contains the remote copy of SNMP.

udp-port

(Optional) Specifies a UDP port of the host to use.

port

(Optional) A UDP port number that the host uses. The default is 162.

v1

(Optional) The least secure of the possible security models.

v2c

(Optional) The second-least secure of the possible security models. It allows for the transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers twice the width of what is normally allowed.

v3

(Optional) The most secure of the possible security models.

encrypted

(Optional) Specifies whether the password appears in encrypted format (a series of digits, masking the true characters of the string).

auth

(Optional) Initiates an authentication level setting session.

md5

(Optional) The HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level.

sha

(Optional) The HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level.

auth-password

(Optional) A string (not to exceed 64 characters) that enables the agent to receive packets from the host.

priv

(Optional) The option that initiates a privacy authentication level setting session.

des56

(Optional) The CBC-DES privacy authentication algorithm.

priv password

(Optional) A string (not to exceed 64 characters) that enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message it sends to the agent.

access

(Optional) The option that enables you to specify an access list.

access-list

(Optional) A string (not to exceed 64 characters) that is the name of the access list.

 
Defaults

Table 2-14 describes default values for the encrypted option, passwords and access lists:

Table 2-14 Default Values for snmp-server user Options

Setting
Description

encrypted

Not present by default. Specifies that the auth and priv passwords are MD5 digests and not text passwords.

passwords

Assumed to be text strings.

access lists

Access from all IP access lists is permitted by default.

remote users

All users are assumed to be local to this SNMP engine unless you use the remote option to specify that they are remote.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

To configure a remote user, specify the IP address or port number for the remote SNMP agent of the device where the user resides. Also, before you configure remote users for a particular agent, configure the SNMP engine ID, using the command snmp-server engineID with the remote option. The remote agent’s SNMP engine ID is needed when computing the authentication/privacy digests from the password. If the remote engine ID is not configured first, the configuration command will fail.

SNMP passwords are localized using the SNMP engine ID of the authoritative SNMP engine. For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent. You need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID in the SNMP database before you can send proxy requests or informs to it.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

snmp-server group

Configures a new SNMP group

snmp-server view

Creates or updates an SNMP view entry

snmp-server view

To create or update a view entry, use the snmp-server view global configuration command. To remove the specified SNMP server view entry, use the no form of the command.

[no] snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded}

 
Syntax Description

view-name

Label for the view record that you are updating or creating. The name is used to reference the record.

oid-tree

Object identifier of the ASN.1 subtree to be included or excluded from the view. To identify the subtree, specify a text string consisting of numbers, such as 1.3.6.2.4, or a word, such as system. Replace a single subidentifier with the asterisk (*) wildcard to specify a subtree family; for example, 1.3.*.4.

included | excluded

Type of view. You must specify either included or excluded.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Other SNMP commands require a view as an argument. You use this command to create a view to be used as arguments for other commands that create records including a view.

When a view is required, you can use one of two standard predefined views instead of defining a view. One predefined view is everything, which indicates that the user can see all objects. The other is restricted, which indicates that the user can see three groups: system, snmpStats, and snmpParties. The predefined views are described in RFC 1447.

The first snmp-server command that you enter enables both versions of SNMP.

Examples

The following example creates a view that includes all objects in the MIB-II subtree:

snmp-server view mib2 mib-2 included
 

The following example creates a view that includes all objects in the MIB-II system group and all objects in the Cisco enterprise MIB:

snmp-server view phred system included
snmp-server view phred cisco included
 

The following example creates a view that includes all objects in the MIB-II system group except for sysServices (System 7) and all objects for interface 1 in the MIB-II interfaces group:

snmp-server view agon system included
snmp-server view agon system.7 excluded
snmp-server view agon ifEntry.*.1 included

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

snmp-server group

Creates a new SNMP group

snmp-server user

Configures an SNMP user to a group

speed (Ethernet interface)

Use the speed (Ethernet) configuration interface command to configure the clock speed on the Ethernet port.

[no] speed {10 | 100 | auto}


Note Cisco recommends that you use auto, the default setting, for both the speed and duplex settings on the Ethernet port.


 
Syntax Description

10

Configures the interface to transmit at 10 Mbps.

100

Configures the interface to transmit at 100 Mbps.

auto

Turns on the Fast Ethernet auto-negotiation capability. The interface automatically operates at 10 or 100 Mbps depending on the speed setting on the switch port to which the device is connected. This is the default setting.

 
Defaults

The default speed setting is auto.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelinesti

Cisco recommends that you use auto, the default setting, for both the speed and duplex settings on the Ethernet port.

When the access point or bridge receives inline power from a switch, any change in the speed or duplex settings that resets the Ethernet link reboots the unit.


Note The speed and duplex settings on the wireless device Ethernet port must match the Ethernet settings on the port to which the wireless device is connected. If you change the settings on the port to which the wireless device is connected, change the settings on the wireless device Ethernet port to match.


Examples

This example shows how to configure the Ethernet port for auto duplex:

AP(config-if)# speed auto

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

duplex

Configures the duplex setting for the Ethernet port

speed (radio interface)

Use the speed configuration interface command to configure the data rates supported by the access point radios. An individual data rate can be set only to a basic or a non-basic setting, not both. Use the no form of the command to remove one or more data rates from the configuration.

This command now includes Modulation Coding Scheme (MCS) settings for 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz 802.11n radios. MCS is a specification of PHY parameters consisting of modulation order (BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM) and FEC code rate (1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6). MCS is used in the 1250 series 802.11n radios, which define 32 symmetrical settings (8 per spatial stream):

  • MCS 0–7
  • MCS 8–15
  • MCS 16–23
  • MCS 24–31

The 1250 series access point supports MCS 0–15. High throughput clients support at least MCS 0–7.

MCS is an important setting because it provides for potentially greater throughput. High throughput data rates are a function of MCS, bandwidth, and guard interval.

 
Syntax Description

For the 802.11b, 2.4-GHz radio:

[1.0] [2.0] [5.5] [11.0]

For the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radio:

[1.0] [2.0] [5.5] [6.0] [9.0] [11.0 ] [12.0] [18.0] [24.0] [36.0] [48.0] [54.0]

For the 5-GHz radio:

[6.0] [9.0] [12.0] [18.0 ] [24.0] [36.0] [48.0] [54.0 ]

For the 802.11b, 2.4-GHz radio:

[basic-1.0] [basic-2.0]
[basic-5.5] [basic-11.0]

For the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radio:

[basic-1.0] [basic-2.0] [basic-5.5] [basic-6.0] [basic-9.0] [basic-11.0 ] [basic-12.0] [basic-18.0] [basic-24.0] [basic-36.0] [basic-48.0] [basic-54.0]

For the 5-GHz radio:

[basic-6.0] [basic-9.0] [basic-12.0] [basic-18.0] [basic-24.0] [basic-36.0] [basic-48.0] [basic-54.0]

For the 2.4-GHz 802.11n radio:

{[1.0] [11.0] [12.0] [18.0] [2.0] [24.0] [36.0] [48.0] [5.5] [54.0] [6.0] [9.0] [basic-1.0] [basic-11.0] [basic-12.0] [basic-18.0] [basic-24.0] [basic-36.0] [basic-48.0] [basic-5.5] [basic-54.0] [basic-6.0] [basic-9.0] [default] [m0-7] [m0.] [m1.] [m10.] [m11.] [m12.] [m13.] [m14.] [m15.] [m2.] [m3.] [m4.] [m5.] [m6.] [m7.] [m8-15] [m8.] [m9.] [ofdm] [only-ofdm] | range | throughput }

(Optional) Sets the access point to allow packets to use the non-basic settings. The access point transmits only unicast packets at these rates; multicast packets are sent at one of the data rates set to a basic setting.

Note At least one of the access point’s data rates must be set to a basic setting.

(Optional) Sets the access point to require the use of the specified data rates for all packets, both unicast and multicast. At least one of the access point's data rates must be set to a basic setting.

Note The client must support the basic rate you select or it cannot associate to the access point.

Note The client must support the basic rate that you select or it cannot associate to the bridge. If you select 12 Mbps or higher for the basic data rate on the 802.11g radio, 802.11b client devices cannot associate to the bridge 802.11g radio.

Enter basic-6.0, basic-9.0, basic-12.0, basic-18.0, basic-24.0, basic-36.0, basic-48.0, and basic-54.0 to set these data rates to basic on the 5-GHz radio.

(Optional) Enter default to set the data rates to factory default settings (not supported on 802.11b radios).

On the 802.11g radio, the default option sets rates 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 to basic, and rates 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 to enabled. These rate settings allow both 802.11b and 802.11g client devices to associate to the bridge 802.11g radio.

On the 5-GHz radio, the default option sets rates 6.0, 12.0, and 24.0 to basic, and rates 9.0, 18.0, 36.0, 48.0, and 54.0 to enabled.

On the 802.11n 2.4-GHz radio, the default option sets rates 1.0, 2.0, 5.5, and 11.0 to enabled.

The default MCS rate setting for both 802.11n radios is 0–15.

For the 5-GHz 802.11n radio:

{[12.0] [18.0] [24.0] [36.0] [48.0] [54.0] [6.0] [9.0] [basic-12.0] [basic-18.0] [basic-24.0] [basic-36.0] [basic-48.0] [basic-54.0] [basic-6.0] [basic-9.0] [default] [m0-7] [m0.] [m1.] [m10.] [m11.] [m12.] [m13.] [m14.] [m15.] [m2.] [m3.] [m4.] [m5.] [m6.] [m7.] [m8-15] [m8.] [m9.] | range | throughput }

On the 802.11n 5-GHz radio, the default option sets rates to 6.0, 12.0, and 24.0 to enabled.

range

(Optional) Sets the data rate for best radio range. On the 2.4-GHz radio, this selection configures the 1.0 data rate to basic and the other data rates to supported. On the 5-GHz radio, this selection configures the 6.0 data rate to basic and the other data rates to supported.

For the 802.11b, 2.4-GHz radio and the 5-GHz radio:
throughput

For the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radio:
throughput [ofdm]

(Optional) Sets the data rate for best throughput. On the 2.4-GHz radio, all data rates are set to basic. On the 5-GHz radio, all data rates are set to basic.

(Optional) On the 802.11g radio, enter speed throughput ofdm to set all OFDM rates (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, and 48) to basic (required) and set all the CCK rates (1, 2, 5.5, and 11) to disabled. This setting disables 802.11b protection mechanisms and provides maximum throughput for 802.11g clients. However, it prevents 802.11b clients from associating to the access point.

default

(Optional) Sets data rates to the default settings.

Note This option is supported on 5-GHz radios and 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radios and 802.11n radios only. It is not available for 802.11b, 2.4-GHz radios.

 
Defaults

On the 802.11b, 2.4-GHz radio, all data rates are set to basic by default.

On the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz radio, data rates 1.0, 2.0, 5.5, 6.0, 11.0, 12.0, and 24.0 are set to basic by default, and the other data rates are supported.

On the 5-GHz radio, data rates 6.0, 12.0 and 24.0 are set to basic by default, and the other data rates are supported.

On the 802.11n 2.4-GHz radio, data rates 1.0, 2.0, 5.5, and 11.0 are set to basic by default and the other data rates are supported..

On the 802.11n 5-GHz radio, data rates 6.0, 12.0, and 24.0 are set to basic by default and the other data rates are supported.

The default MCS rate setting for both 802.11n radios is 0–15.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(8)JA

Parameters were added to support the 5-GHz access point radio.

12.2(11)JA

Parameters were added to support the 5.8-GHz bridge radio.

12.2(13)JA

Parameters were added to support the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz access point radio.

12.3(2)JA

The ofdm parameter was added to the throughput option for the 802.11g, 2.4-GHz access point radio.

12.4(10b)JA

Parameters were added to support the 2.4- and 5-GHz 802.11n radios. The mcs parameter was added.

Examples

This example shows how to set the radio data rates for best throughput:

AP(config-if)# speed throughput
 

This example shows how to set the radio data rates support a low-speed client device while still supporting higher-speed client devices:

AP(config-if)# speed basic-1.0 2.0 5.5 11.0
 

The following example shows a speed and mcs setting for an 802.11n 5-GHz radio:

AP(config-if)# interface Dot11Radio0
speed basic-1.0 2.0 5.5 11.0 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 m0. m1. m2. m3. m4. m8. m9. m10. m11. m12. m13. m14. m15.

 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operation configuration

speed ofdm

Specifies the way that the access point advertises supported OFDM data rates in beacons and probe responses

speed ofdm

Use the speed ofdm configuration interface command to adjust the way that the access point advertises supported OFDM data rates in beacons and probe responses. Use the no form of the command to return to the default setting.

[no] speed ofdm {join | separate}

 
Syntax Description

join

Specifies that supported OFDM data rates appear in both information element (IE) 1 and IE 50. This is the default setting.

separate

Specifies that supported OFDM data rates appear only in IE 50.

 
Defaults

By default, supported OFDM data rates are listed in beacons and probe responses in both IE 1 and in IE 50.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(2)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

By default, access points are configured with the speed ofdm join command and advertise supported data rates in ascending order in both IE 1 and in IE 50 in beacons and probe responses:

IE 1: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18

IE 50: 24, 36, 48, 54

However, some legacy 802.11b client devices cannot properly interpret the OFDM data rates in IE 1 and either associate at a data rate below 11 Mps or do not associate at all. To improve performance for these clients, you can use the speed ofdm separate command to list only 802.11b data rates in IE 1 and OFDM data rates in IE 50:

IE 1: 1, 2, 5.5, 11

IE 50: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54

Examples

This example shows how to configure the access point to advertise only 802.11b data rates in IE 1 in beacons and probe responses:

AP(config-if)# speed ofdm separate

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

speed (radio interface)

Configures the supported data rates on access point radio interfaces

ssid

Use the ssid interface configuration command to assign a globally configured SSID to a radio interface. Use the no form of the command to remove an SSID from a radio interface.

[no] ssid ssid-string

In Cisco IOS Release 12.3(4)JA, you can configure SSIDs globally or for a specific radio interface, but all SSIDs are stored globally. After you use the dot11 ssid global interface command to create an SSID, you use the ssid command to assign the SSID to a specific interface.

 
Syntax Description

ssid-string

Specifies the SSID name for the radio, expressed as a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 32 characters.

 
Defaults

On access points, the factory default SSID is tsunami. On bridges, the default SSID is autoinstall.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to specify a unique SSID for your wireless network. Several access points on a network, or subnetwork, can share an SSID. The no form of the command removes the SSID, which inhibits clients that use that SSID from associating with the access point.

Examples

This example shows how to:

  • Create an SSID in global configuration mode
  • Configure the SSID for RADIUS accounting
  • Set the maximum number of client devices that can associate using this SSID to 15
  • Assign the SSID to a VLAN
  • Assign the SSID to a radio interface
AP# configure terminal
AP(config)# dot11 ssid batman
AP(config-ssid)# accounting accounting-method-list
AP(config-ssid)# max-associations 15
AP(config-ssid)# vlan 3762
AP(config-ssid)# exit
AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# ssid batman
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

authentication open (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support open authentication

authentication shared (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support shared authentication

authentication network-eap (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support network-EAP authentication

dot11 ssid

Creates an SSID in global configuration mode

guest-mode (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support guest mode

max-associations (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the maximum number of associations supported by the radio interface (for the specified SSID)

show running-config ssid

Displays configuration details for SSIDs created in global configuration mode

vlan (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support a specific Ethernet virtual LAN (VLAN)

station-role

Use the station-role configuration interface command to set the role of the radio interface. Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to the default value.

1100 and 1130 AG Series Access Points

station-role
{repeater |
root [access-point [fallback {shutdown | repeater}] |
scanner |
workgroup-bridge }

1200 and 1240AG Series Access Points

station-role
{non-root [bridge [wireless-clients] | wireless clients] |
repeater |
root [access-point [fallback {shutdown | repeater}] | ap-only] |
root [bridge [wireless-clients]] |
scanner |
workgroup-bridge }

1250 Series Access Points


Note Bridge mode is not supported for 802.11n or non-802.11n data rates. Also, Cisco does not recommend configuring bridge mode on the 1250 series access point even though the commands for it are available.


350 Series Access Points

station-role
{repeater |
root [fallback {shutdown | repeater}] |
scanner}

1310 Access Points/Bridges

station-role
{
install [automatic | non-root | root] |
non-root [bridge | wireless clients] |
repeater |
root [access-point [fallback {shutdown | repeater}] | ap-only] |
root [bridge [wireless-clients]] |
scanner |
workgroup-bridge}

1400 Series Bridges

station-role
{
install [automatic | non-root | root] |
non-root bridge |
root bridge
}

 

repeater

Specifies that the access point is configured for repeater operation. Repeater operation indicates the access point is not connected to a wired LAN and must associate to a root access point that is connected to the wired LAN.

Note This option is not supported on 1400 series bridges.

root access-point

Specifies that the access point and bridge is configured for root mode operation and connected to a wired LAN. This parameter also specifies that the access point should attempt to continue access point operation when the primary Ethernet interface is not functional.

Note This option is not supported on 1400 series bridges.

root ap-only

Specifies that the device functions only as a root access point. If the Ethernet interface is not functional, the unit attempts to continue access point operation. However, you can specify a fallback mode for the radio.

Note This option is supported only on 1200, 1240AG, and 1310 series access points and bridges.

root bridge

Specifies that the access point or bridge operates as the root bridge in a pair of bridges. This mode does not support wireless client associations.

Note On the 1200 and 1240AG series access points, this option supports only point-to-point bridge operation.

Note On the 1300 and 1400 series bridges, this option supports point-to-point and multipoint bridge operation.

root bridge wireless-clients

Specifies that the root bridge mode accepts associations from client devices.

Note This option is supported only on 1200, 1240AG, and 1310 series access points and bridges.

non-root bridge

Specifies that the access point or bridge operates as a non-root bridge and must associate to a root bridge.

This option is supported only on 1200, 1240AG, 1310, and 1400 series access points and bridges.

non-root wireless clients

Specifies that the non-root bridge mode accepts associations from client devices.

Note This option is supported only on 1200, 1240AG, and 1310 series access points and bridges.

scanner

This option is supported only when used with a WLSE device on your network. It specifies that the access point operates as a radio scanner only and does not accept associations from client devices. As a scanner, the access point collects radio data and sends it to the WDS access point on your network.

Note This option is supported only on 1100, 1130AG, 1200, 1240, and 1300 series access points and bridges.

fallback shutdown

Specifies that the access point should shutdown when the primary Ethernet interface is not functional.

Note This option is supported only on 1100, 1130AG, 1200, 1240AG, and 1310 series access points and bridges in access point mode.

fallback repeater

Specifies that the access point should operate in repeater mode when the primary Ethernet interface is not functional.

Note This option is supported only on 1100, 1130AG, 1200, 1240AG, and 1310 series access points and bridges in access point mode.

install

Configures the bridge for installation mode. In installation mode, the bridge flashes its LEDs to indicate received signal strength (RSSI) to assist in antenna alignment.

Note This option is supported only on 1310 and 1400 series bridges.

workgroup-bridge

Specifies that the device operates in workgroup bridge mode. As a workgroup bridge, the device associates to an access point or bridge as a client and provides a wireless LAN connection for devices connected to its Ethernet port.

Note This option is supported only on 1100, 1130AG, 1200, 1240AG, and 1310 series access points and bridges.

 
Defaults

Access points operate as root access points by default. When set to defaults, Cisco Aironet 1400 Series Wireless Bridges start up in install mode and adopt the root role if they do not associate to another bridge. If a 1400 series bridge associates to another bridge at start-up, it automatically adopts the non-root role. Cisco Aironet 1310 Access Points/Bridges operate as root access points by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(11)JA

This command was modified to support 5-GHz bridges.

12.2(13)JA

This command was modified to include access point scanner mode and settings for 1300 series bridges.

12.3(2)JA

This command was modified to support workgroup-bridge mode on 1100 series access points.

12.3(4)JA

This command was modified to support workgroup-bridge mode on 1200 series access points and repeater mode on 1310 access points/bridges.

12.3(7)JA

This command was modified to support root and non-root bridge modes for 1200 and 1240AG series access points, root bridge with wireless clients mode on 1310 series access points/bridges, workgroup bridge and scanner modes for 1130AG series access points, and scanner mode for 1100 series access points.

Examples

This example shows how to configure an access point for root operation and shutdown when Ethernet is not functional:

AP(config-if)# station-role root fallback shutdown
 

This example shows how to configure an access point for repeater operation:

AP(config-if)# station-role repeater
 

This example shows how to reset an access point or bridge to default operation:

AP(config-if)# no station-role
 

This example shows how to set a bridge to root operation:

bridge(config-if)# station-role root
 

This example shows how to set a 1310 access point/bridge to root access point operation and shutdown when Ethernet is not functional:

bridge(config-if)# station-role root ap-only fallback shutdown
 

This example shows how to configure a 1310 access point/bridge as a non-root bridge that accepts associations from client devices:

bridge(config-if)# station-role non-root wireless clients
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration

station-role install

To configure the bridge for installation mode, use the station-role install in the configuration interface mode. In installation mode, the bridge flashes the LEDs to indicate received signal strength.

station-role install [automatic | non-root | root]


Note This command is supported only on 1310,1400 and 1530 series bridges.


 
Syntax Description

automatic

(Optional) Specifies that the bridge automatically selects the root or non-root role in install mode when it starts up. If the bridge does not associate to another bridge at start-up, the bridge adopts the root role. If a bridge associates to another bridge at start-up, it adopts the non-root role.

non-root

(Optional) Specifies that bridge starts up in install mode as a non-root bridge.

root

(Optional) Specifies that bridge starts up in install mode as a non-root bridge.

 
Defaults

When set to defaults, the bridges start up in root mode and adopt the root role if they do not associate to another bridge. If a bridge associates to another bridge at start-up, it automatically adopts the non-root role. The station-role install command can be configured only on one radio at a time.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

15.2(4)JB

This command was modified.

Examples

This example shows how to set the bridge to install mode, non-root:

bridge(config-if)# station-role install non-root
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

station-role

Configures the bridge for root, non-root, or install mode

tacacs server

To configure the TACACS server on the access point, use the tacacs server command in the configuration mode.

tacacs server name

 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies the TACACS server name.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Configuration Mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

 

timeout-absolute

To specify a timeout period that controls the duration for a session that can be connected before it is terminated, use the timeout absolute command in the interface configuration mode. To remove the session timeout period, use the no form of this command.

timeout absolute minutes [seconds]

no timeout absolute

 
Syntax Description

minutes

seconds

Session lifetime, in minutes. The range is 0 to 71582.

(Optional) Session lifetime, in seconds. The range is 0 to 59.

 
Defaults

No timeout absolute parameter is set.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(3)JAB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the timeout period in the interface configuration mode:

AP(config-if)# timeout absolute 71582 45

transmit-op (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Use the transmit-op QOS Class interface configuration mode command to configure the CAC transmit opportunity time for a radio interface. Use the no form of the command to remove the setting.

transmit-op 0-65535

no transmit-op


Note This command is not supported when operating in repeater mode.


 
Syntax Description

0-65535

Specifies the transmit opportunity time (0 to 65535 usec).

 
Defaults

When QoS is enabled, the default transmit-op settings for access points match the values in Table 2-15 , and the default transmit-op settings for bridges match the values in Table 2-16 .

Table 2-15 Default transmit op Definitions for Access Points

Class of Service
Transmit Opportunity

Background

0

Best Effort

0

Video <100ms Latency

300810

Voice <100ms Latency

150411

10.6016—On access points with IEEE 802.11b radios

11.3264—On access points with IEEE 802.11b radios

Table 2-16 Default transmit op Definitions for Bridges

Class of Service
Transmit Opportunity

Background

0

Best Effort

0

Video <100ms Latency

3008

Voice <100ms Latency

1504

 
Command Modes

QOS Class interface configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the CAC transmit opportunity time for the radio interface:

AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# dot11 qos class voice
AP(config-if-qosclass)# transmit-op 100
 

This example shows how to remove the CAC transmit opportunity time for the radio interface:

AP(config-if-qosclass)# no transmit-op
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admission-control (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC admission control is required for the radio interface.

admit-traffic (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies that CAC traffic is enabled for the radio interface.

cw-max (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Spcifies the CAC maximum contention window size for the radio interface.

cw-min (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Spcifies the CAC minimum contention window size for the radio interface.

fixed-slot (QOS Class interface configuration mode)

Specifies the CAC fixed fallback slot time for the radio interface.

traffic-class

Use the traffic-class configuration interface mode command to configure the radio interface quality-of-service (QoS) traffic class parameters for each of the eight traffic types. Use the no form of the command to reset a specific traffic class to the default values.

[no] traffic-class { best-effort | background | video | voice }
cw-min 0-10
cw-max 0-10
fixed-slot 0-20

 
Syntax Description

best-effort

Specifies the best-effort traffic class category

background

Specifies the background traffic class category

video

Specifies the video traffic class category

voice

Specifies the voice traffic class category

cw-min 0-10

Specifies the minimum value (0 to 10) for the contention window

cw-max 0-10

Specifies the maximum value (0 to 10) for the contention window

fixed-slot 0-20

Specifies the fixed slot backoff interval value (0 to 20)

 
Defaults

When QoS is enabled, the default traffic class settings for access points match the values in Table 2-17 , and the default traffic class settings for bridges match the values in Table 2-18 .

 

Table 2-17 Default QoS Radio Traffic Class Definitions for Access Points

Class of Service
Min Contention Window
Max Contention Window
Fixed Slot Time
Transmit Opportunity

Background

5

10

7

0

Best Effort

5

10

3

0

Video <100ms Latency

4

5

2

300812

Voice <100ms Latency

2

4

2

150413

12.6016—On access points with IEEE 802.11b radios

13.3264—On access points with IEEE 802.11b radios

 

Table 2-18 Default QoS Radio Traffic Class Definitions for Bridges

Class of Service
Min Contention Window
Max Contention Window
Fixed Slot Time
Transmit Opportunity

Background

4

10

7

0

Best Effort

4

10

3

0

Video <100ms Latency

3

4

2

3008

Voice <100ms Latency

2

3

2

1504

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(13)JA

This command was modified to support four traffic classes (best-effort, background, video, and voice) instead of eight (0–7).

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to control the backoff parameters for each class of traffic. Backoff parameters control how the radio accesses the airwaves. The cw-min and cw-max arguments specify the collision window as a power of 2. For example, if the value is set to 3, the contention window is 0 to 7 backoff slots (2 to the power 3 minus 1). The fixed-slot arguments specify the number of backoff slots that are counted before the random backoff counter starts to count down.

For best performance on your bridge links, adjust the CW-min and CW-max contention window settings according to the values listed in Table 2-19 . The default settings, CW-min 3 and CW-max 10, are best for point-to-point links. However, for point-to-multipoint links, you should adjust the settings depending on the number of non-root bridges that associate to the root bridge.


Note If packet concatenation is enabled on the bridge, adjust the CW-min and CW-max settings only for traffic class 0. Concatenation is enabled by default.


 

Table 2-19 CW-min and CW-max Settings for Point-to-Point and Point-to-Multipoint Bridge Links

Setting
Point-to-Point Links
Point-to-Multipoint Links with up to 5 Non-Root Bridges
Point-to-Multipoint Links with up to 10 Non-Root Bridges
Point-to-Multipoint Links with up to 17 Non-Root Bridges

CW-min

3

4

5

6

CW-max

10

10

10

10

Examples

This example shows how to configure the best-effort traffic class for contention windows and fixed slot backoff values. Each time the backoff for best-effort is started, the backoff logic waits a minimum of the 802.11 SIFS time plus 2 backoff slots. Then it begins counting down the 0 to 15 backoff slots in the contention window.

AP(config-if)# traffic-class best-effort cw-min 4 cw-max 10 fixed-slot 2
 

This example shows how to disable traffic class support:

AP(config-if)# no traffic-class
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

concatenation (bridges only)

Enables packet concatenation on the bridge radio

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration

traffic-stream

Use the traffic-stream configur ation interface command to specify CAC traffic stream properties for a radio interface. Use the no form of the command to disable the properties.

traffic-stream priority 0-7 sta-rates rate1 [rate2] [rate3]

no traffic-stream priority 0-7 sta-rates


Note This command is not supported on repeaters.


 
Syntax Description

0-7

Specifies the priority level for the traffic stream.

rate1... rateN

Specifies the rates allowed on the 802.11g and 802.11a radio interfaces. The supported rates are listed below:

12.0—allow 12 Mbps
24.0—allow 24 Mbps
6.0—allow 6 Mbps
nom-12.0—allow nominal 12 Mbps
nom-24.0—allow nominal 24 Mbps
nom-6.0—allow nominal 6 Mbps

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure CAC traffic-stream support for a nominal 24 Mbps rate for priority 7 on the 802.11a radio interface:

AP(config)# interface dot11radio 1
AP(config-if)# traffic-stream priority 7 sta-rates nom-24.0
 

This example shows how to disable CAC traffic-stream priority 7 support on the radio interface:

AP(config-if)# no traffic-stream priority 7 sta-rates
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

admit-traffic

Configures CAC admission control on the access point.

admit-traffic (SSID Configuration Mode)

Enables or disables CAC admission control for the SSID.

show dot11 cac

Displays admission control information on the access point.

debug cac

Provides debug information for CAC admission control on the access point.

username (dot1x credentials configuration mode)

Use the username dot1x credentials configuration mode command to specify dot1x credential username. Use the no form of the command to disable the credential username.

[no] username name

 
Syntax Description

name

Specifies the username for the dot1x credential.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Dot1x credentials configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the dot1x credential username:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# username john101

This example shows how to disable the credential username:

AP(config-dot1x-creden)# no username
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x credentials

Configures the dot1x credentials on the access point.

show dot1x credentials

Displays the configured dot1x credentials on the access point.

user (local server configuration mode)

Use the user local server configuration command to specify the users allowed to authenticate using the local authenticator. As a local authenticator, the access point performs LEAP, EAP-FAST, and MAC-based authentication for up to 50 client devices. The access point performs up to 5 authentications per second.

user username
{password | nthash} password
[group group-name]
[mac-auth-only]


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

username

Specifies the user’s username. To add a client device for MAC-based authentication, enter the device’s MAC address.

password password

Specifies the password assigned to the user. To add a client device for MAC-based authentication, enter the device’s MAC address.

nthash password

Specifies the NT value of the user’s password. If you only know the NT value of the password, which you can often find in the authentication server database, you can enter the NT hash as a string of hexadecimal digits.

group group-name

(Optional) Specifies the user group to which the user is assigned

mac-auth-only

(Optional) Specifies that the user is allowed to authenticate using only MAC authentication.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Local server configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(15)JA

This command was modified to support MAC address authentication on the local authenticator.

12.3(2)JA

This command was modified to support EAP-FAST authentication on the local authenticator.

Examples

This example shows how to add a user to the list of clients allowed to authenticate using LEAP on the local authenticator:

AP(config-radsrv)# user sam password rover32 group cashiers
 

This example shows how to add a user to the list of clients allowed to authenticate using MAC-based authentication on the local authenticator:

AP(config-radsrv)# user 00074218d01b password 00074218d01b group cashiers
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

group (local server configuration mode)

Creates a user group on the local authenticator and enters user group configuration mode

nas (local server configuration mode)

Adds an access point to the list of NAS access points on the local authenticator

radius-server local

Enables the access point as a local authenticator and enters local server configuration mode

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

username privilege password

To assign a username, set privilege levels and create a password while configuring SSH, use the user privilge password command in local server configuration mode.

user username
[privilege 0-15]
[password 0,7]

 
Syntax Description

username

Specifies user’s username.

privilege

Specifies user privileges assigned to the user. The range is from 1 to 15.

password

Specifies the password assigned to the user. The value is 0 and 7. 0 creates an unencrypted password. 7 creates a encrypted password.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Local server configuration mode

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(2)JB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to add a username, assign user privilges and create a encrypted password.

AP(config)# username cisco privilege 2 password 7
 

vlan (SSID configuration mode)

Use the vlan SSID configuration mode command to configure the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support a specific Ethernet virtual LAN (VLAN). Use the no form of the command to reset the parameter to the default value.

[no] vlan vlan-id

 
Syntax Description

vlan-id

Specifies the virtual Ethernet LAN identification number for the SSID

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the VLAN that uses the radio SSID (wireless LAN):

AP(config-if-ssid)# vlan 2
 

This example shows how to reset the VLAN parameter to default values:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no vlan

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters the SSID configuration mode

vocera

802.11b audio transmissions from a Vocera B1000 (Gen 1) badge may intermittently fail to be forwarded by a Cisco access point. The same failure to forward can impact Zebra Print servers (Model 420+ revision C) and Marvell 88W8385 cards. A wireless packet trace can show you that the AP1142 or AP1252 will intermittently fail to acknowledge the data transmissions from the B1000 badge. You can use the radio interface configuration command vocera to resolve this data transmission loss.

The radio interface configuration command vocera is applicable to Marvell Radio APs such as AP 1040, AP 1140, AP 1250, and newer models. This command is not applicable to AMAC radios such as AP 1130 and AP 1240. You can run this command on autonomous APs running Cisco IOS release 12.4(21a)JY or later.

vocera

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration mode.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(21a)JY

This command was introduced.

Examples

AP# configure terminal
AP(config)# interface dot11radio 0
AP(config-if)# vocera

 

web-auth

To enable web authentication of a SSID user, use the web-auth command in SSID configuration interface mode.

[no] web-auth

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to enable web authentication of a SSID user:

AP(config-if-ssid)# web-auth

 

This example shows how to disable web authentication of a SSID user:

AP(config-if-ssid)# no web-auth

 

wlccp ap eap profile

Use the wlccp ap eap profile global configuration command to enable an EAP profile for WLSM. Use the no form of this command to disable the EAP profile.

wlccp ap eap profile profile name

no wlccp ap eap profile

 
Syntax Description

profile name

Specifies the EAP profile name.

 
Defaults

This command has no default setting.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the wlccp ap eap profile command to enable an eap profile for WLSM.

This example shows how to create an EAP profile:

AP(config)# wlccp ap eap profile test
 

This example shows how to disable the EAP profile:

AP(config)# no wlccp ap eap profile

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

eap profile

Configures an EAP profile on the access point.

method
(eap profile configuration mode)

Configures EAP types for the EAP profile.

show eap registrations

Displays EAP registrations for the access point.

show eap sessions

Displays EAP statistics for the access point.

dot1x eap profile

Configures a dot1x EAP profile for an interface.

wlccp ap username

Use the wlccp ap username global configuration command to configure an access point to authenticate through the device configured for wireless domain services (WDS) and participate in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM). Use the no form of the command to disable the username.

wlccp ap username username password password

no wlccp ap username username


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

username username

Specifies the username that the access point uses when it authenticates through the device configured for WDS

password password

Specifies the password that the access point uses when it authenticates through the device configured for WDS

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the username and password for an access point that will participate in CCKM:

AP(config)# wlccp ap username birdman password 8675309
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

wlccp authentication-server

Specifies server lists for 802.1x authentication for client and infrastructure devices participating in CCKM

wlccp authentication-server

Use the wlccp authentication-server global configuration command to configure the list of servers to be used for 802.1x authentication for infrastructure devices and client devices enabled for Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM).

wlccp authentication-server
client { any | eap | leap | mac } list |
infrastructure list


Note This command is not supported on bridges and 350 series access points.


 
Syntax Description

client
{ any | eap | leap | mac } list

Specifies the server list to be used for 802.1x authentication for client devices. You can specify a server list for a specific 802.1x authentication method, or use the any option to specify a list to be used for for all 802.1x authentication methods.

  • eap—usually used with non-Cisco wireless adapters. Any wireless LAN client which uses a value of 0 in the algorithm field in the 802.11 association request frame can use EAP. This authentication-server setting must be used with the authentication open eap statement under the SSID configuration for each access point participating in WDS.
  • leap—usually used with Cisco Aironet wireless adapters. Any WLAN client which uses a value of 128 in the algorithm field in the 802.11 association request frame can use LEAP. This authentication-server setting must be used with the authentication network-eap statement under the SSID configuration for each access point participating in WDS.
  • mac—used for any RADIUS-based MAC authentication used with WDS. This authentication-server setting must be used with the authentication open mac or the authentication network-eap mac statement under the SSID configuration for each access point participating in WDS.

infrastructure list

Specifies the server list to be used for 802.1x authentication for infrastructure devices, such as other access points

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the server list for LEAP authentication for client devices:

AP(config)# wlccp authentication-server client leap leap-list1
 

This example shows how to configure the server list for 802.1x authentication for infrastructure devices participating in CCKM:

AP(config)# wlccp authentication-server infrastructure wlan-list1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

authentication network-eap (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support network-EAP authentication with optional MAC address authentication

authentication open (SSID configuration mode)

Configures the radio interface (for the specified SSID) to support open authentication and optionally MAC address authentication or EAP authentication

wlccp ap username

Configures an access point to participate in CCKM

wlccp wds priority

Configures an access point for WDS

wlccp wds aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Use the wlccp wds aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache global configuration command to enable MAC authentication caching on the access point. MAC authentication caching reduces overhead because the access point authenticates devices in its MAC-address cache without sending the request to your authentication server. When a client device completes MAC authentication to your authentication server, the access point adds the client’s MAC address to the cache.

wlccp wds aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache [timeout seconds]

 
Syntax Description

timeout seconds

Specifies a timeout value for MAC authentications in the cache.

 
Defaults

MAC authentication caching is disabled by default. When you enable it, the default timeout value is 1800 (30 minutes).

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure MAC authentication caching with a one-hour timeout:

ap(config)# wlccp wds aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache timeout 3600
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Clear MAC addresses from the MAC authentication cache.

dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Enable MAC authentication caching on the access point.

show dot11 aaa authentication mac-authen filter-cache

Display MAC addresses in the MAC authentication cache.

show wlccp

Display information on devices participating in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM) and WDS, including addresses in the MAC authentication cache.

wlccp wds mode wds-only

Use the wlccp wds mode wds-only global configuration command to configure 16b access poins to operate in the WDS-only mode. After issuing this command and restarting, the access point starts working in the WDS-only mode. In WDS-only mode, the dot11 subsystems are not initialized and the dot11 interface related commands cannot be configured. In WDS-only mode, the WDS supports up to 60 infrastructure access points and up to 1200 clients.

This command is supported only on 16 Mb access points (1100 and 1200 series). It is not supported on 32 Mb access points (1130, 1240 series, etc.) It is intended to be used to free up memory necessary to run as a WDS. To run a 32 Mb access point in WDS-only mode, set the Dot11Radio0 and Dot11Radio1 interfaces to shutdown.

To set the WDS access point to operate in both AP and WDS modes, use the no wlccp wds mode wds-only command and restart the access point immediately. After the access point restarts, the dot11 radio subsytems initialize. The access point and WDS associate directly to wireless clients. In this mode, the WDS supports 30 infrastructure access points and 600 clients in addition to 20 direct wireless client associations.

wlccp wds mode wds-only

 
Defaults

This command has no default

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.3(8)JEB

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure WDS-only mode:

ap(config)# wlccp wds mode wds-only

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show wlccp

Display information on devices participating in Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM) and WDS, including addresses in the MAC authentication cache.

wlccp wds priority

Use the wlccp wds priority global configuration command to configure an access point to provide Wireless Domain Services (WDS). When configuring Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM), you configure one or more access points or switches as candidates to provide WDS. The device with the highest priority provides WDS.

wlccp wds
priority priority
interface interface


Note This command is not supported on bridges and 350 series access points.


 
Syntax Description

priority priority

Specifies the priority of the access point among devices configured to provide WDS. Enter a priority number from 1 to 255.

interface interface

Specifies the interface on which the access point sends out WDS advertisements. For this release, you must use bvi 1 as the interface for WDS advertisements.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the priority for an access point as a candidate to provide WDS:

AP(config)# wlccp wds priority 200 interface bvi 1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

wlccp ap username

Configures an access point to participate in CCKM

wlccp authentication-server

Specifies server lists for 802.1x authentication for client and infrastructure devices participating in CCKM

wlccp wnm ip address

Use the wlccp wnm ip address global configuration command to configure the IP address of the wireless network manager (WNM) that performs network management for the wireless LAN to which the access point belongs.

wlccp wnm ip address


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(13)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the IP address of the wireless network manager:

AP(config)# wlccp wnm ip address 10.10.0.101
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

wlccp ap username

Configures an access point to participate in CCKM

wlccp authentication-server

Specifies server lists for 802.1x authentication for client and infrastructure devices participating in CCKM

workgroup-bridge client-vlan

Use the workgroup-bridge client-vlan configuration interface command to assign a VLAN to the devices attached to a workgroup bridge. This command enables VLAN trunking on the workgroup bridge’s radio and Ethernet interfaces.

workgroup-bridge client-vlan vlan-id


Note This command is supported only on 1100 and 1200 series access points and 1300 series access points/bridges.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(15)JA

This command was introduced.

12.3(2)JA

This command was modified to support 1100 series access points.

Examples

This example shows how to assign a VLAN to the devices attached to a workgroup bridge:

wgb(config-if)# workgroup-bridge client-vlan 17
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration

workgroup-bridge no_reset

Use the workgroup-bridge no_reset configuration to prevent a WGB from resetting while roaming. This allows the WGB to roam reliably, when using 5GHz. However, note that enabling this command may impact the WGB's maximum transmit power.

workgroup-bridge no_reset

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(03)JC

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to set a radio to not reset while roaming with power changes between channels:

wgb(config-if)# workgroup-bridge no_reset
 

 

workgroup-bridge timeouts assoc-response

Use the workgroup-bridge timeouts assoc-response global configuration command to fine tune the association response timeout for WGB. This CLI command is applicable to an AP working in WGB mode.

workgroup-bridge timeouts assoc-response ms


Note This command is supported only on APs that support a station role of “WGB.”


 
Syntax Description

ms

Enter a number from 800 to 5000.

 
Defaults

The default association response timeout is 5000 ms.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(25d)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to assign an authentication response timeout for a workgroup bridge:

wgb(config-if)# workgroup-bridge timeouts assoc-response 800
 

workgroup-bridge timeouts auth-response

Use the workgroup-bridge timeouts auth-response global configuration command to fine tune the authentication response timeout for WGB. This CLI command is applicable to an AP working in WGB mode.

workgroup-bridge timeouts auth-response ms


Note This command is supported only on APs that support a station role of “WGB.”


 
Syntax Description

ms

Enter a number from 800 to 5000.

 
Defaults

The default authentication response timeout is 5000 ms.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(25d)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to assign an authentication response timeout for a workgroup bridge:

wgb(config-if)# workgroup-bridge timeouts auth-response 800
 
 
 

workgroup-bridge timeouts channel-scan

Use the workgroup-bridge timeouts channel-scan global configuration command to set the time spent by a WGB for scanning channels. If a WGB spends too much time scanning for parent APs, thereby taking too long to roam, then you can use this command to shorten the time spent by the WGB for scanning a channel. Also, if a WGB is unable to find parent APs, you can set a longer scan time to enable the WGB to scan the channels more. This command is particularly useful when the WGB is physically roaming, wherein it faces multiple parent-AP candidates.

workgroup-bridge timeouts channel-scan ms


Note This command is supported only on APs that support a station role of “WGB.”


 
Syntax Description

ms

Enter 8, 20, or 40, to specify the timeout in milliseconds.

Fast scan timeout is 8 ms.

Medium scan timeout is 20 ms.

Slow scan timeout is 40 ms.

 
Defaults

By default, the Cisco Aironet 700, 1530 and 803 series APs use a default channel scan duration of 40 ms, while other APs use a channel scan duration of 8 ms.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.3(03)JC

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to assign a fast scan timeout for a workgroup bridge:

wgb(config-if)# workgroup-bridge timeouts channel-scan 8
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mobile-station scan

Constrains the set of channels that the WGB will scan.

workgroup-bridge timeouts client-add

Use the workgroup-bridge timeouts client-add global configuration command to fine tune the client add timeout for WGB. This CLI command is applicable to an AP working in WGB mode.

workgroup-bridge timeouts client-add ms


Note This command is supported only on APs that support a station role of “WGB.”


 
Syntax Description

ms

Enter a number from 800 to 5000.

 
Defaults

The default client add timeout is 5000 ms.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(25d)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to assign a client add timeout to a workgroup bridge:

wgb(config-if)# workgroup-bridge timeouts client-add 800

workgroup-bridge timeouts eap-timeout

Use the workgroup-bridge timeouts eap-timeout global configuration command to fine tune the EAP timeout for WGB. This CLI command is applicable to an AP working in WGB mode.

workgroup-bridge timeouts eap-timeout sec


Note This command is supported only on APs that support a station role of “WGB.”


 
Syntax Description

sec

Enter a number from 2 to 600.

 
Defaults

The default eap-timeout is 0 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(25d)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This is the timeout to complete the full EAP authentication on a workgroup bridge.

This value highly depends on the EAP authentication algorithm. Ensure that you understand the deployment scenario (depending on the turn-around time to the radius server and the number of transactions) and use this command appropriately. If you want to use 802.1x EAP, you should not assign a timeout value of less than 30 seconds.

When this command is used along with the CLI command “mobile station scan period <>”, it is suggested to use “scan period” > “eap timeout”.

Examples

This example shows how to assign an EAP timeout on a workgroup bridge:

wgb(config)# workgroup-bridge timeouts eap-timeout 20
 

workgroup-bridge timeouts iapp-refresh

Use the workgroup-bridge timeouts iapp-refresh global configuration command to fine tune the IAPP refresh timeout. This CLI command is applicable to an AP working in WGB mode only.

workgroup-bridge timeouts iapp-refresh ms


Note This command is supported only on APs that support a station role of “WGB.”


 
Syntax Description

ms

Enter a number from 100 to 1000.

 
Defaults

The default iapp refresh timeout is 1000 ms.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(25d)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to assign an IAPP refresh timeout to a workgroup bridge:

wgb(config-if)# workgroup-bridge timeouts iapp-refresh 100
 

workgroup-bridge unified-vlan-client

Use the workgroup-bridge unified-vlan-client configuration interface command to enable the Workgroup Bridge (WGB) VLAN tagging feature.

[no] workgroup-bridge unified-vlan-client [broadcast-replicate]


Note This command is supported only on APs that support a station role of “WGB.”


 
Syntax Description

no

Enables/disables the The Workgroup-Bridge (WGB) VLAN tagging feature.

broadcast-replicate

Enables WGB broadcast to all VLANs.

 
Defaults

The default is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.4(25d)JA

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command is used for the unified solution.

Examples

This example shows how to enable WGB broadcast to all VLANs:

wgb(config-if)# workgroup-bridge unified-vlan-client broadcast-replicate
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration

 

world-mode

Use the world-mode configuration interface mode command to enable access point world mode operation. You can configure the access point to support 802.11d world mode or Cisco legacy world mode. Use the no form of the command to disable world mode operation.

[no] world-mode
dot11d country_code code {both | indoor | outdoor} |
legacy

 
Syntax Description

dot11d country_code code {both | indoor | outdoor}

Enables 802.11d world mode.

  • When you enter the dot11d option, you must enter a two-character ISO country code (for example, the ISO country code for the United States is US). You can find a list of ISO country codes at the ISO website.
  • After the country code, you must enter indoor, outdoor, or both to indicate the placement of the access point.

legacy

Enables Cisco legacy world mode.

 
Defaults

World mode is disabled by default.

 
Command Modes

Configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)JA

This command was introduced.

12.2(15)JA

This command was modified to support 802.11d world mode.

 
Usage Guidelines

With world mode enabled, the access point advertises the local settings, such as allowed frequencies and transmitter power levels. Clients with this capability then passively detect and adopt the advertised world settings, and then actively scan for the best access point. Cisco client devices running firmware version 5.30.17 or later detect whether the access point is using 802.11d or Cisco legacy world mode and automatically use world mode that matches the mode used by the access point.

Examples

This example shows how to enable 802.11d world mode operation:

AP(config-if)# world-mode dot11d country-code TH both
 

This example shows how to disable world mode operation:

AP(config-if)# no world-mode dot11d

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current access point operating configuration

wpa-psk

Use the wpa-psk SSID interface configuration command to configure a pre-shared key for use in WPA authenticated key management. To support WPA on a wireless LAN where 802.1x-based authentication is not available, you must configure a pre-shared key for the SSID.

wpa-psk { hex | ascii } [ 0 | 7 ] encryption-key


Note This command is not supported on bridges.


 
Syntax Description

hex

Specifies entry of the pre-shared key in hexadecimal characters. If you use hexadecimal, you must enter 64 hexadecimal characters to complete the 256-bit key.

ascii

Specifies ASCII entry of the pre-shared key. If you use ASCII, you must enter a minimum of 8 letters, numbers, or symbols, and the access point expands the key for you. You can enter a maximum of 63 ASCII characters.

encryption-key

Specifies the pre-shared key

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

SSID configuration interface

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(11)JA

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a WPA pre-shared key for an SSID:

AP(config-if-ssid)# wpa-psk ascii shared-secret-key
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

authentication key-management

Specifies authenticated key management for an SSID

encryption mode ciphers

Specifies a cipher suite

ssid

Specifies the SSID and enters SSID configuration mode

write memory

Use the write memory command to copy the running configuration into flash memory (NVRAM).

write memory

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC command.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)T

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If an error message similar to the following displays, then there is no available space for the configuration file in the flash memory:

Error writing new config file “flash:/config.txt.new”, nv_done:unable to open “flash:/config.txt.new.” Error writing new block-fs “file flash:/private-multiple-fs.new”

Examples

This example shows the command entry and the resulting command response:

AP1242aG#write memory
Building configuration...
[OK]

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

copy system:/running-config url

Writes the running configuration onto a server on the network. Previously, the write network command.

Note See the Cisco IOS mainline documentation for more details on this command.

write terminal

Writes (displays) the running configuration to a terminal screen.

write terminal

Use the write terminal command to write the running configuration to the terminal screen.

write terminal

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

This command has no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC command.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

12.2(4)T

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

None.

Examples

This example shows the command entry and the resulting command response:

AP1242aG#write terminal
Building configuration...
 
Current configuration : 1541 bytes
!
version 12.4
no service pad
service timestamps debug datetime msec
service timestamps log datetime msec
service password-encryption
!
hostname AP1242AG
!
enable secret 5 $1$/oiR$795MDnTXWfV1xC.jf7YFd/
!
aaa new-model
!
!
!
aaa session-id common
!
resource policy
!
ip subnet-zero
!
--More-- !
--More-- power inline negotiation prestandard source
--More-- !
--More-- username Cisco password 7 02250D480809
--More-- !
--More-- bridge irb
--More-- !
--More-- !
--More-- interface Dot11Radio0
--More-- no ip address
--More-- no ip route-cache
--More-- shutdown
--More-- station-role root
--More-- bridge-group 1
--More-- bridge-group 1 subscriber-loop-control
--More-- bridge-group 1 block-unknown-source
--More-- no bridge-group 1 source-learning
--More-- no bridge-group 1 unicast-flooding
--More-- bridge-group 1 spanning-disabled
--More-- !
--More-- interface Dot11Radio1
--More-- no ip address
--More-- no ip route-cache
--More-- shutdown
--More-- dfs band 3 block
--More-- channel dfs
--More-- station-role root
--More-- bridge-group 1
--More-- bridge-group 1 subscriber-loop-control
--More-- bridge-group 1 block-unknown-source
--More-- no bridge-group 1 source-learning
--More-- no bridge-group 1 unicast-flooding
--More-- bridge-group 1 spanning-disabled
--More-- !
--More-- interface FastEthernet0
--More-- no ip address
--More-- no ip route-cache
--More-- duplex auto
--More-- speed auto
--More-- bridge-group 1
--More-- no bridge-group 1 source-learning
--More-- bridge-group 1 spanning-disabled
--More-- !
--More-- interface BVI1
--More-- ip address 10.91.107.16 255.255.255.192
--More-- no ip route-cache
--More-- !
--More-- ip default-gateway 10.91.107.1
--More-- ip http server
--More-- no ip http secure-server
--More-- ip http help-path http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/779/smbiz/prodconfig/help/eag
--More-- !
--More-- control-plane
--More-- !
--More-- bridge 1 route ip
--More-- !
--More-- !
--More-- !
--More-- line con 0
--More-- exec-timeout 0 0
--More-- logging synchronous
--More-- line vty 0 4
--More-- exec-timeout 0 0
--More-- logging synchronous
--More-- !
--More-- end

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

write memory

Writes the running configuration into flash memory (NVRAM) of an access point.

copy system:/running-config url

Writes the running configuration onto a server on the network. Previously, the write network command.

Note See the Cisco IOS mainline documentation for more details on this command.